JP2020127580A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine which can improve the amusement of a performance.SOLUTION: A game machine varies a decorative drawing pattern according to a variable display of a special drawing pattern, and perpetually stops the decorative drawing pattern according to a stop display of the special drawing pattern. A light emission performance can be carried out in the variable display of the special drawing pattern. The light emission performance includes a winning light emission performance carried out when the decorative drawing pattern is displayed in a mode of giving a notification of a jackpot, and not-ready-to-win light emission performance carried out when the decorative drawing pattern is displayed in a mode of not giving the notification of the jackpot. In the case of a ready-to-win failure, the winning light emission performance and the not-ready-to-win light emission performance are not carried out. In the case of a failure other than the ready-to-win failure, the not-ready-to-win light emission performance can be carried out. In the case of the jackpot, the winning light emission performance and the not-ready-to-win light emission performance can be carried out in a different execution time.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 24

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine that determines whether or not to execute a special game and executes an effect based on the determination result.

In the conventional gaming machine, when it is determined whether or not a game ball is won in the starting opening and the special game is executed, the special symbol display device displays the determination result after the special symbol is variably displayed. The design is stopped and displayed. In the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1, in a predetermined image display device, the decorative symbol is variably displayed along with the variable display of the special symbol, and the determination result is displayed along with the special symbol being stopped and displayed. The decorative design is stopped and displayed.

JP, 2005-96091, A

By the way, in the conventional game machine, there is room for improvement in terms of improving the interest of the effect.

Therefore, an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the entertainment of the effect.

The present invention adopts the following configurations in order to solve the above problems.

A gaming machine according to the present invention is a gaming machine including a main control means and an effect control means, wherein the main control means determines whether or not to perform a special game based on establishment of a start condition. Based on the determination result of the determination unit, the identification information control unit that stops and displays the identification information that notifies the determination result after a predetermined time after the identification information is variably displayed, and a control that transmits the predetermined control information. And an information transmitting unit, the effect control unit can receive the control information transmitted from the control information transmitting unit, can execute a game effect in response to the reception, and the game effect , A decorative design that causes the decorative design to be variably displayed with the variable display of the identification information, and the decorative design that is stopped with the stop display of the identification information, and an effect that expects the special game to be executed There is a reach effect executed when the decorative pattern is a reach mode during the variable display, and a light emission effect executed when the decorative pattern is displayed during the variable display. In the effect, the specific light emission effect that is executed when the decorative pattern is displayed in a mode that notifies that the special game is executed, and the decorative pattern that is not notified that the special game is executed There is a predetermined light emission effect that is executed when displaying, and when notifying that the special game is not executed, when the reach effect is executed, the specific light emission effect and the predetermined light emission effect are not executed. When the reach effect is not executed, the predetermined light emitting effect can be executed in a predetermined execution time, and when notifying that the special game is to be executed, the specific light emitting effect is executed differently from the predetermined execution time. It can be done in time.

According to the present invention, it is possible to improve the enjoyment of the production.

Outline front view of pachinko gaming machine 1 Schematic plan view showing a part of the pachinko gaming machine 1. Enlarged view of display 4 in FIG. Block diagram showing a configuration example of a control device of the pachinko gaming machine 1. Flowchart showing an example of main processing executed by the game control unit 100 A detailed flowchart of the starting opening switch process in step S2 of FIG. Detailed flowchart of the gate switch process in step S3 of FIG. Detailed flowchart showing the special symbol processing of step S4 in FIG. The flowchart which shows the detail of the jackpot determination process of step S407 of FIG. The flowchart which shows the detail of the fluctuation pattern setting process of step S408 of FIG. Detailed flowchart showing the processing during stoppage of step S416 of FIG. Detailed flowchart showing the normal symbol processing of step S5 of FIG. Detailed flowchart showing the special winning opening process of step S6 of FIG. Detailed flowchart showing the game state setting process of step S620 of FIG. Detailed flowchart of the electric tulip process in FIG. It is a diagram showing a breakdown of the jackpot symbol selected according to the winning of each starting opening, a diagram showing the contents of the jackpot game corresponding to each symbol Figure showing an example of a decorative design The figure which shows one example of the aspect of the decorative design in the game state and each production section The figure which shows one example of the fluctuation pattern table which is used when selecting the fluctuation pattern of the special design in the normal game state Diagram showing an example of a variation pattern table used when selecting the variation pattern of the special symbol in the probability variation gaming state Figure showing the flow of the variation production including SPSP reach production The figure which shows the details of the hit information which is done as a result of SPSP reach production The figure which shows an example of the image displayed on the screen at the time of performing the variable production including the SPSP reach production shown in FIG. FIG. 23 is a diagram illustrating an example of an image displayed on the screen when the hit notification is performed, which is an effect subsequent to FIG. The figure which shows the details of the loss information which is done as a result of SPSP reach production FIG. 23 is an illustration subsequent to FIG. 23, showing an example of an image displayed on the screen when the notification of loss is performed. The figure which shows the flow of the production when the re-lottery production is performed during the hit notification The figure which shows an example of the image displayed on the screen at the time of re-lottery production being performed during the hit notification. The figure which shows the flow of the fluctuation production which includes the special production The figure which shows the details of the hit information which is done as a result of special production The figure which shows an example of the image displayed on the screen at the time of performing the variable production including the special production shown in FIG. The figure which shows the other example of the image displayed on the screen at the time of performing a variable production including a special production. The figure which shows the flow of the fluctuation production when it is decided to be the big hit in the probability variation game state The figure which shows an example of the image displayed on the screen at the time of the variation production shown in FIG. The figure which shows an example of the production following FIG. The figure which shows an example of the flow of the fluctuation production when the second light emission effect is performed after the first light emission effect when the hit notification is performed in the probability variation game state. The figure which shows one example of the production which is indicated in the picture when it is decided with 4R normal big hit in probability variation game state Time chart for explaining the execution timing of the non-reach light emission effect in the normal gaming state Explanatory drawing for demonstrating an example of the non-reach middle light emission production when three decorative symbols 55 are temporarily stopped at the same time in the normal game state. Explanatory drawing for demonstrating an example of the non-reach medium emission effect when three decorative symbols 55 are temporarily stopped in order in the normal game state. Time chart for explaining the execution timing of the non-reach light emission effect in the probability variation gaming state Explanatory drawing for demonstrating an example of the non-reach light emission effect in the case where three decorative symbols 55 are temporarily stopped at the same time in the probability variation game state. Explanatory drawing for demonstrating an example of the non-reach medium emission effect when three decorative symbols 55 are temporarily stopped in order in the probability variation game state. A table for explaining the total number of non-reach light emission effects for each variation pattern in the normal gaming state Table for explaining the total number of non-reach during the light emission effect for each variation pattern in the probability variation gaming state Time chart for explaining the execution timing of the first reach symbol light emission effect in the normal gaming state Time chart for explaining the execution timing of the first reach symbol light emission effect and the second reach symbol light emission effect in the normal game state Explanatory drawing for demonstrating an example of the reach luminescence production in a normal game state. Explanatory drawing for explaining an example of the reach symbol light emission effect in the normal gaming state Explanatory drawing for explaining an example of the flow after the end of the second reach symbol light emission effect in the normal gaming state Explanatory drawing for explaining an example of the flow after the end of the second reach symbol light emission effect in the normal gaming state Time chart for explaining the execution timing of the reach light emission effect in the probability variation gaming state Explanatory drawing for explaining an example of the first reach symbol light emission effect in the probability variation gaming state Explanatory drawing for demonstrating an example of the flow after completion of the first reach symbol light emission effect in the probability variation gaming state. Table for explaining the total number of times the first reach symbol light emission effect, the second reach symbol light emission effect and the hit light emission effect in the normal game state A table for explaining the total number of times of the first reach symbol light emission effect, the second reach symbol light emission effect, and the hit light emission effect in the probability variation gaming state. The figure which shows an example of the flow of the production over the variation of a plurality of special symbols when the prefetch chance eye is displayed. The figure which shows an example of the image displayed on a screen when the production shown in FIG. 57 is performed. The figure which shows an example of the effect following FIG. The figure which shows an example of the variation effect when the NEXT symbol suggesting pseudo-relation is displayed in the normal game state. The figure which shows an example of the image displayed on a screen when the variation production shown in FIG. 57 is performed. The figure which shows the comparison of the rocking|fluctuation period of the decorative design 55 when the pre-reading chance eye light emission production, reach light emission production, and hit light emission production are performed. The figure which shows the comparison of the swing periods of the decorative symbols when the effect control unit 130 does not normally receive the command from the game control unit 100. Flowchart showing an example of a timer interrupt process performed in the effect control unit 130 Flowchart showing an example of the command receiving process in step S1001 of FIG. A detailed flowchart of the hold command process in step 1302 of FIG. A detailed flowchart of the fluctuation start command processing in step 1304 of FIG. The flowchart which shows an example of the timer interruption process performed in the image audio control part 140. Detailed flowchart of lamp control processing by the lamp control unit 150

Hereinafter, the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to an embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings as appropriate.

[Schematic configuration example of pachinko gaming machine 1]
First, the schematic configuration of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 and 2. FIG. 1 is a schematic front view of a pachinko gaming machine 1. FIG. 2 is a schematic plan view showing a part of the pachinko gaming machine 1. As illustrated in FIG. 1, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is provided with a game board 2 provided with winning prizes, prizes, determination (lottery), and the like, and a frame member 3 surrounding the game board 2. The frame member 3 supports a transparent glass plate arranged in parallel with the game board 2 at a predetermined interval, and the glass plate and the game board 2 form a game area 10 in which a game ball can flow down. Has been done.

When the player holds the handle 20 and rotates the lever 21 in the clockwise direction, the game balls stored in the upper plate 28 are guided to the launching device (not shown), and the hitting force according to the rotation angle of the lever 21 is applied. It is launched into the game area 10. The game area 10 is provided with a game nail, a windmill, and the like (not shown), and the launched game ball is guided to an upper position in the game area 10 and comes into contact with the game nail, the windmill, or the like. It drops along the game board 2 while changing the moving direction. Note that the game ball is temporarily stopped when the player operates the stop button 22.

The upper plate 28 collects game balls and prize balls to be supplied to the launching device. Below the upper plate 28, a lower plate 29 for collecting prize balls is provided. When the player operates the take-out button 23 arranged in proximity to the lower plate 29, a part of the lower surface of the lower plate 29 is opened, and the game balls accumulated in the lower plate 29 are arranged below the lower plate 29. It falls into a box (not shown).

When the player performs a so-called "left hit" in which the lever 21 is kept rotated at a small rotation angle, the game ball is hit with a relatively weak hitting force. In this case, the game ball flows down the left side area in the game area 10 as illustrated by an arrow 31. On the other hand, when the player performs a so-called "right hit" in which the lever 21 is kept rotated at a large rotation angle, the game ball is hit with a relatively strong hitting force. In this case, the game ball flows down the right side area in the game area 10 as illustrated by the arrow 32.

On the passage of the game ball left-handed, a first starting opening 11, a second starting opening 12, two ordinary winning openings 14, a first gate 15, and an electric tulip 17 are provided as a winning/judging character. Has been. In addition, in the passage path of the game ball that has been hit to the right, the second starting opening 12, the large winning opening 13, the two normal winning openings 14, the second gate 16, and the electric tulip as a winning/judging character. 17 are provided.

The game ball shot in the game area 10 flows into any of the first starting opening 11, the second starting opening 12, the large winning opening 13, and the normal winning opening 14 in the process of flowing down along the game board 2. And win the prize. As a result, a predetermined number of prize balls corresponding to the place where the prize is won are paid out to the upper plate 28 or the lower plate 29. The game balls that have not won the prize are discharged from the game area 10 through the discharge port 18.

The first starting opening 11 serving as the first starting area is a starting opening that is always open, and the second starting opening 12 serving as the second starting area is operated by the electric tulip 17 serving as an ordinary electric accessory. It is a starting port that is opened only when. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, when the game ball passes through the first starting port 11 and wins, or when the game ball passes through the second starting port 12 and wins, a jackpot game (special game) advantageous to the player Is determined, and the determination result is displayed on the display device 4 described later.

In the following description, the determination executed on condition that the game ball is won in the first starting opening 11 is called "first special symbol determination", and the game ball is winning in the second starting opening 12 as a condition. The determination to be executed is called "second special symbol determination", and these determinations (lottery) are collectively referred to as "special symbol determination (special symbol lottery)".

The special winning opening 13 is a special winning area opened according to the result of the special symbol determination. A plate for opening and closing the special winning opening 13 is provided at the opening of the special winning opening 13. The special winning opening 13 is normally closed by this plate. On the other hand, when the predetermined jackpot pattern indicating that the determination result of the special symbol determination is “big hit” is stopped and displayed on the display 4, the jackpot game in which the plate is operated to open the special winning opening 13 Is executed. For this reason, the player can obtain more prize balls by performing a right hit during the jackpot game, as compared to when the jackpot game is not played.

The electric tulip 17 is disposed in the vicinity of the second starting port 12 and has a pair of blade members. The electric tulip 17 is configured such that the pair of blade members can change its posture between a closed posture (see FIG. 1) in which the second starting port 12 is closed and an open posture (not shown) in which the second starting port 12 is opened. ing.

The second starting opening 12 is normally closed by an electric tulip 17, as illustrated in FIG. 1. On the other hand, when the game ball passes through the first gate 15 or the second gate 16, it is determined whether or not to open the second starting opening 12 although the prize balls are not paid out. When it is determined that the second starting port 12 is opened, the pair of blade members of the electric tulip 17 maintain the open position for the specified time and then return to the closed position for the specified number of times. In this way, the second starting opening 12 is in a state in which the game ball does not easily pass when the electric tulip 17 is not operating, while the game ball easily passes by operating the electric tulip 17. Become. In the following description, the determination (lottery) executed on the condition that the game ball passes through the first gate 15 or the second gate 16 will be referred to as “normal symbol determination (normal symbol lottery)”.

The normal winning opening 14 is always open like the first starting opening 11, and is a winning opening through which a predetermined number of winning balls are paid out by winning a game ball. Unlike the first starting opening 11 and the like, the determination (lottery) is not performed even if the game ball wins the normal winning opening 14.

In the gaming machine 1, when a game ball passes through the second starting opening 12 and wins a prize, a big hit, a small hit (as an example, a small hit may occur with a probability of 1/7), and a loss Which of the above may be determined. Further, at the end of the jackpot game, the gaming state may shift from the low-probability gaming state and the non-auxiliary gaming state to the low-probability gaming state and the auxiliary gaming state (the gaming state will be described later). In such a gaming machine 1, for example, when a jackpot symbol for notifying that it is a jackpot is stopped and displayed on the display device 4 (specifically, the second special symbol display device 42), the jackpot 13 is given. The jackpot game to be used is executed. On the other hand, when the small hit symbol for notifying that it is a small hit is stopped and displayed on the display device 4, first, the small hit game using the small prize hole having the V prize hole inside is executed. For example, a plate for opening and closing the small winning opening is provided at the opening of the small winning opening. The small winning opening is normally closed by this plate. When the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed on the display 4, a small hit game is executed in which the above-mentioned plate is operated to open the small winning opening. On the condition that the game ball has passed the V winning opening during this small hitting game, the big hitting game using the big winning opening 13 is started following the small hitting game. For this reason, the player can get more prize balls by performing a right hit during the small hitting game, as compared to when the small hitting game is not performed. If the game ball does not pass through the V winning opening during the small hit game, the big hit game following the small hit game is not executed, and the game state does not shift to the time saving game state.

[Configuration Example of Rendering Means of Pachinko Gaming Machine 1]
As illustrated in FIG. 1, the game board 2 or the frame member 3 is provided with a liquid crystal display device 5, a movable accessory 7, a speaker 24, a board lamp 25, and an effect button 26 for performing various effects. Has been. Further, the frame member 3 includes a frame lamp 37 (see FIG. 4) which is not shown in FIG.

The liquid crystal display device 5 is an image display device that displays an effect image, and is provided at a position that is easily visible to the player. On the liquid crystal display device 5, for example, various display objects such as a decorative symbol for informing the determination result of the special symbol determination, a character or an item for performing a notice effect, and a hold icon displayed for the number of times the special symbol determination is suspended. An effect image including is displayed. The image display device may be configured by another image display device such as an EL display device.

The movable accessory 7 is configured to be movable with respect to the game board 2, and is normally retracted to the retreat position between the screen and the game board 2 on the left and right of the screen of the liquid crystal display device 5, and the operation is performed. It is sometimes configured to extend to the front of the screen. A light emitting element (for example, an LED) is built in the movable accessory 7, and a part or all of the movable accessory 7 emits light by causing the LED to emit light. The movable accessory 7 performs various effects by operating or emitting light based on the result of the special symbol determination.

The panel lamp 25 and the frame lamp 37 perform various effects by light, such as changing the lighting or blinking pattern and changing the emission color. The speaker 24 outputs music, voice, sound effect, etc. in synchronization with the display effect performed by the liquid crystal display device 5 to perform sound effect.

In the present embodiment, in order to suggest the possibility of a big hit (hereinafter referred to as “reliability”), an effect image can be displayed on the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 5 or an effect means capable of emitting light (specifically, In some cases, the production accessory 7, the board lamp 25, and the frame lamp 37) may be caused to emit light. In the present embodiment, white, blue, green, red, zebra, and iridescent colors are used as colors that indicate high or low reliability. The reliability of each color is high in the above order. In the present embodiment, colors of red and below are used in the case of a big hit and in the case of a loss, and do not function as a color suggesting a big hit (that is, the reliability is 100%). Zebra has relatively high reliability regardless of which production is used, and there is a production that uses zebra only when it is a big hit and a production that uses zebra when it is a big hit and when it is lost. is there. Specifically, for example, the zebra functions as a color that suggests a big hit when used for the effect of displaying a cut-in image, and has relatively high reliability when used for the color of the hold icon (for example, about 76%). The rainbow color has 100% reliability and is used only when it is a big hit (that is, it is not used when it is a loss). As a color that suggests a big hit, other monochromatic colors (for example, red) may be used instead of zebra and iridescent colors, and other composite colors (for example, composite colors of red, yellow, and white) are used. You may be asked.

[Configuration Example of Operation Means of Pachinko Gaming Machine 1]
As illustrated in FIG. 2, the frame member 3 is provided with an effect button 26 and an effect key 27 as operation means operated by the player. The effect button 26 is a push button for inputting operation information when the player presses it. The effect button 26 is configured to be able to project upward by a drive mechanism (not shown). At the time of execution of the effect using the effect button 26 (specifically, from the start to the end of the effective period during which the operation of the effect button 26 is effective), the upper surface remains in the normal state and more than in the normal state. It may project. The presence or absence of the protrusion may be determined based on, for example, the determination result of the jackpot determination, the type of the jackpot symbol, the type of the variation pattern, or all or a part thereof. Thereby, the reliability of the jackpot can be suggested by the mode of the effect button 26. In the present embodiment, one type of operation (that is, depression) can be performed on the effect button 26 regardless of the presence or absence of protrusion.

It should be noted that in other embodiments, the operating means may be preconfigured so that a plurality of types of operations can be performed on one operating means. For example, the type of operation that can be performed on the effect button 26 in the normal state and the type of operation that can be performed on the effect button 26 in the protruding state may be different. Specifically, for example, the effect button 26 can be pressed in the normal state, and when the effect button 26 is controlled to be in the protruding state, the effect button 26 is controlled to be impossible to press and the upper surface of the effect button 26 is controlled. It may be configured so that the player can perform an operation such as pulling toward the player. For example, the player may be prompted to perform any one operation selected from a plurality of types of operations prepared in advance in order to suggest the reliability of the jackpot. Which type of operation is to be promoted may be determined based on, for example, the determination result of the jackpot determination, the type of the jackpot symbol, the type of the variation pattern, or all or a part thereof.

The effect key 27 is a so-called cross key for the player to perform a selection operation. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, there is a case where an effect corresponding to the operation of the effect button 26 or the effect key 27 is performed.

In addition to the effect button 26, an operation means operable by the player may be provided. For example, two operation means having different jackpot reliability may be provided. For example, when the reliability is relatively low, the player is prompted to operate the first operation means (for example, the effect button 26), and when the reliability is relatively high, the operation of the second operation means is performed by the player. May be prompted by. The second operating means may be provided, for example, at a position where the player has difficulty in operating the first operating means (for example, on the left side of the lower plate 29). As a result, it is possible to indicate the reliability depending on which operation means the operation is prompted by the player. When the second operation means is operated during the operation promoting effect that prompts the operation of the first operation means, the same effect as when the first operation means is operated may be executed according to the operation. Another effect different from the case where the first operation means is operated may be executed, or no effect may be executed.

[Configuration Example of Display 4]
FIG. 3 is an enlarged view of the display device 4 in FIG. The display device 4 is mainly for displaying information regarding special symbol determination and normal symbol determination, and as illustrated in FIG. 3, a first special symbol display device 41, a second special symbol display device 42, a first. It is configured to have a special symbol hold indicator 43, a second special symbol hold indicator 44, a normal symbol indicator 45, a normal symbol hold indicator 46, a game state indicator 47, a round indicator 48 and the like.

When the first special symbol determination is performed, the first special symbol display 41 displays the symbols in a variable manner, and then stops and displays the determination symbol indicating the determination result of the first special symbol determination to determine the first special symbol. Notify the judgment result. When the second special symbol determination is performed, the second special symbol display 42 variably displays the symbols and then stops and displays the determination symbol indicating the determination result of the second special symbol determination, thereby the second special symbol determination. Notify the judgment result. In the first special symbol display device 41 and the second special symbol display device 42, as a determination symbol, the jackpot symbol indicating that the determination result of the special symbol determination is “big hit”, or the determination result of the special symbol determination is “miss”. The lost symbol indicating "" is stopped and displayed.

The first special symbol reservation display 43 displays the number of reservations for the first special symbol determination. The second special symbol reservation display 44 displays the number of reservations for the second special symbol determination.

When the normal symbol determination is performed, the normal symbol display 45 notifies the determination result of the normal symbol determination by displaying the symbol in a variable manner and then stopping and displaying the determination symbol indicating the determination result of the normal symbol determination. The normal symbol holding display 46 displays the number of holdings of the normal symbol judgment. The gaming status display 47 displays the gaming status when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on. The round indicator 48 displays the number of rounds of the jackpot game when the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol indicator 41 or the second special symbol indicator 42.

In the following description, the symbols displayed on the first special symbol display 41 are called "first special symbols", and the symbols displayed on the second special symbol display 42 are called "second special symbols". Are collectively called "special design". Further, the symbol displayed on the normal symbol display device 45 is referred to as "normal symbol".

[Configuration of control device of pachinko gaming machine 1]
On the back side of the game board 2, in addition to a ball tank for storing game balls paid out as prize balls, a control device for controlling the operation of the pachinko game machine 1 is provided.

Hereinafter, the configuration of the control device of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing a configuration example of a control device of the pachinko gaming machine 1. As shown in FIG. 4, the control device of the pachinko gaming machine 1 has a game control unit 100 and a game control unit that control execution of determination (lottery), control of a jackpot game, command transmission processing to the effect control unit 130, and the like. 100 production control based on the command received from 100, production control unit 130, image and sound control unit 140 that controls the production of images and sounds, and lamp control that controls the production of various lamps and movable accessory 7. The unit 150 is provided. In addition to the one shown in FIG. 4, the pachinko gaming machine 1 also includes a payout control unit (not shown) that controls payout of prize balls.

[Structure of game control unit 100]
The game control unit 100 includes a CPU 101, a ROM 102, and a RAM 103. Based on the programs stored in the ROM 102, the CPU 101 performs various calculation processes related to the number of payout prize balls such as internal lottery and determination of winning. The RAM 103 is used as a storage area for temporarily storing various data used when the CPU 101 executes the program or a work area for data processing.

In the game control unit 100, a first starting port switch (SW) 111, a second starting port switch (SW) 112, an electric tulip opening/closing unit 113, a first gate switch (SW) 114, a second gate switch (SW) 115. The special winning opening switch (SW) 116, the special winning opening control unit 117, the normal winning opening switch (SW) 118, and the display 4 are connected.

The first starting port switch 111 detects that a game ball has won in the first starting port 11 and outputs a detection signal to the game control unit 100. The second starting opening switch 112 detects that a game ball has won in the second starting opening 12, and outputs the detection signal to the game control unit 100. The electric tulip opening/closing unit 113 operates the electric solenoid connected to the pair of blade members of the electric tulip 17 in a drive-transmittable manner in response to a control signal from the game control unit 100 to open/close the second starting opening 12. To do. The first gate switch 114 detects that the game ball has passed through the gate 15 and outputs the detection signal to the game control unit 100. The second gate switch 115 detects that the game ball has passed through the gate 16 and outputs the detection signal to the game control unit 100. The special winning opening switch 116 detects that the game ball has entered the special winning opening 13, and outputs the detection signal to the game control unit 100. The special winning opening control unit 117 opens and closes the special winning opening 13 by operating an electric solenoid driveably connected to a plate closing the special winning opening 13 in response to a control signal from the game control unit 100. To do. The normal winning opening switch 118 detects that the game ball has entered the normal winning opening 14, and outputs the detection signal to the game control unit 100.

The CPU 101 of the game control unit 100 receives a detection signal from the first starting opening switch 111, the second starting opening switch 112, the special winning opening switch 116, or the normal winning opening switch 118, and the place where the game ball has won. The payout control unit is instructed to pay out a predetermined number of prize balls according to the above, and the number of prize balls to be paid out is managed based on the information from the payout control unit.

The CPU 101 acquires a random number at the timing when the detection signal from the first starting port switch 111 is input, and executes the first special symbol determination using the acquired random number. Further, the CPU 101 acquires a random number at the timing when the detection signal from the second starting port switch 112 is input, and executes the second special symbol determination using the acquired random number. When the result of the special symbol determination is a big hit, the special game is executed by opening and closing the special winning opening 13 via the special winning opening control unit 117. Further, the CPU 101 acquires a random number at the timing when the detection signal from the gate switch 114 or 115 is input, and executes the normal symbol determination using the acquired random number. Then, when the result of the normal symbol determination is a hit, the second starting port 12 is temporarily opened by operating the electric tulip 17 via the electric tulip opening/closing unit 113.

Further, the CPU 101 transmits information indicating the start or stop of fluctuation of the special symbol to the effect control unit 130. In addition, the CPU 101 transmits to the effect control unit 130 information relating to variation settings of the winning probability of the special symbol lottery and variation settings of the winning probability of the ordinary symbol lottery. In addition, the CPU 101 transmits to the effect control unit 130 data indicating a shortening setting of the variation time of the special symbol, information for notifying that the game ball has won the first starting opening 11 or the second starting opening 12, and the like. ..

Further, the CPU 101 executes the following processing on the display unit 4. That is, when the CPU 101 executes the first special symbol determination, the first special symbol display 41 variably displays the special symbol, and then the special symbol indicating the determination result is stopped and displayed. Further, when the CPU 101 executes the second special symbol determination, the second special symbol display 42 variably displays the special symbol and then the special symbol indicating the determination result is stopped and displayed. Further, when the CPU 101 executes the normal symbol determination, the normal symbol display device 45 causes the normal symbol to be variably displayed, and then the normal symbol indicating the determination result is stopped and displayed.

Further, the CPU 101, the first special symbol determination hold number is displayed on the first special symbol hold display 43, the second special symbol determination hold number is displayed on the second special symbol hold display 44, the normal symbol determination The number of reservations is displayed on the normal symbol reservation display 46. Further, the CPU 101 causes the gaming status display 47 to display the gaming status of the pachinko gaming machine 1. Further, the CPU 101 causes the round indicator 48 to display the number of rounds of the big hit game.

[Configuration of production control unit 130]
The effect control unit 130 includes a CPU 131, a ROM 132, a RAM 133, and an RTC (real time clock) 134. The CPU 131 performs arithmetic processing for controlling the effect based on the program stored in the ROM 132. The RAM 133 is used as a storage area for temporarily storing various data used when the CPU 131 executes the program or a work area for data processing. The RTC 134 measures the current date and time.

The effect control unit 130 sets effect contents based on the data indicating the result of the special symbol determination sent from the game control unit 100. The effect control unit 130 transmits a command instructing the execution of the effect of the set effect content to the audiovisual control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150.

The image and sound control unit 140 performs image display control of the liquid crystal display device 5 and sound output control of the speaker 24. The image/sound control unit 140 includes a CPU 141, a ROM 142, a RAM 143, a VDP (Video Display Processor) 144, an acoustic DSP (Digital Signal Processor) 145, and the like. Based on the program stored in the ROM 142, the CPU 141 performs a calculation process when controlling an image or a sound expressing the effect whose effect content is set in the effect control unit 130. The RAM 143 is used as a storage area for temporarily storing various data used when the CPU 141 executes the program or a work area for data processing.

The VDP 144 generates an effect image displayed on the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 5. The acoustic DSP 145 generates acoustic data output from the speaker 24. The CPU 141 controls the operations of the VDP 144 and the acoustic DSP 145 by generating a control signal based on the command from the effect control unit 130 and the program stored in the ROM 142 and outputting the control signal to the VDP 144 and the acoustic DSP 145.

Although not shown in the figure, the VDP 144 has a drawing engine that executes the drawing process of the effect image, and an output circuit that outputs the effect image drawn by the drawing engine to the liquid crystal display device 5. The drawing engine draws the effect image in the frame buffer using the material data stored in the ROM based on the control signal from the CPU 141. The output circuit outputs the effect image drawn in the frame buffer to the liquid crystal display device 5 at a predetermined timing.

Although not shown in the figure, the acoustic DSP 145 is used as an acoustic ROM for storing various acoustic data relating to musical effects, voices, and effect sounds such as sound effects, and as a work area for data processing by the acoustic DSP 145. SDRAM is connected. The acoustic DSP 145 reads out acoustic data corresponding to the control signal from the CPU 141 from the acoustic ROM to the SDRAM, executes data processing, and outputs the acoustic data after the data processing to the speaker 24.

[Configuration of Lamp Control Unit 150]
The lamp control unit 150 includes a CPU 151, a ROM 152, and a RAM 153. The CPU 151 performs arithmetic processing when controlling the operations of the board lamp 25, the frame lamp 37, the effect button 26, and the movable accessory 7, based on the program stored in the ROM 152. The RAM 153 is used as a storage area for temporarily storing various data used when the CPU 151 executes the program or a work area for data processing.

The ROM 152 stores light emission pattern data and operation pattern data. The light emission pattern data is data indicating the respective light emission patterns of the frame lamp 37, the panel lamp 25, and the light emitting elements included in the movable accessory 7. The motion pattern data is data indicating a motion pattern of the movable accessory 7.

The CPU 151 reads out the light emission pattern data corresponding to the command received from the effect control unit 130 from the light emission pattern data stored in the ROM 152 to the RAM 153, and then the board lamp 25, the frame lamp 37, the effect button 26, and the movable role. The light emission of the light emitting element of the object 7 is controlled. Further, the CPU 151 reads, from the operation pattern data stored in the ROM 152, the operation pattern data corresponding to the command received from the effect control unit 130 into the RAM 153, and operates the movable auditors 7 and the effect button 26. Controls motor drive.

[Explanation of game state]
Here, the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described. In the gaming state, a low-probability gaming state in which the probability of being a jackpot is the first probability, and a high-probability gaming state in which the probability of being a jackpot is a second probability higher than the first probability. There is.

The first probability and the second probability, which are jackpot probabilities, may be fixed values. Further, the first probability and the second probability may change depending on the setting.

For example, the jackpot probability may be set to different probabilities by the hall clerk performing a predetermined operation. For example, when the power of the gaming machine 1 is turned on, a set value related to the jackpot probability is set in accordance with an operation (for example, depression) of a set value switch (not shown) provided on the back surface of the game control board 100. (For example, any one of "1" to "6") can be set. The set value switch is, for example, a switch for setting the jackpot probability to different probabilities.

For example, the larger the set value is, the easier it is to win the jackpot, and the ratio between the second probability, which is the jackpot probability in the high-probability game state, and the first probability, which is the jackpot probability in the low-probability game state, does not depend on the set value. It may be fixed. For example, the jackpot probability in the low-probability game state is set to 1/220 when the setting value is "1", 1/200 when the setting value is "2", and the setting value is When it is "3", it is set to 1/180. Further, the jackpot probability in the high-probability gaming state is set to 1/27.5 (=1/220×8 times) when the set value is “1”, and the set value is “2”. Sometimes it is set to 1/25 (=1/200×8 times), and when the set value is “3”, it is set to 1/22.5 (=1/180×8 times).

A setting key, a setting change switch, and a set value display device may be provided for setting the jackpot probability. The setting change switch may be provided exclusively for it, or may be used together with a RAM clear switch (a switch for initializing the RAM 103 of the game control unit 100). When the setting change switch is used together with the RAM clear switch, for example, when the power is turned on with the setting key turned on (pressed) and the RAM clear switch turned on, the jackpot probability setting When the power is turned on with the setting key turned on and the RAM clear switch turned off, the jackpot probability setting confirmation mode is entered, the setting key is turned off, and When the power is turned on while the RAM clear switch is turned on, the mode is switched to the RAM clear mode (the mode in which the RAM 103 of the game control unit 100 is initialized and the gaming machine is started up), and the setting key is turned off. Also, when the power is turned on with the RAM clear switch turned off, the power recovery mode (the RAM 103 of the game control unit 100 is not initialized, and the game machine is kept in a state where the data at the time of the last power-off is maintained. You may shift to the startup mode). The gaming machine of the present embodiment is provided with a capacitor for holding data stored in the RAM 103 (see FIG. 4) of the gaming control unit 100 when the power is turned off, and the power is supplied for a certain period (for example, 24 hours). The data in the RAM 103 can be maintained even if the data is cut off.

Further, the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment has a non-auxiliary gaming state and an auxiliary gaming state. The auxiliary game state has a relatively higher probability of being determined as a hit in the normal symbol determination than the non-assistant game state (for example, 1/1.1). In the auxiliary game state, the opening time of the electric tulip 17 when it is determined to be a hit in the ordinary symbol determination is relatively long (for example, 1.8 seconds×3 times), and the variation time of the ordinary symbol is relatively The state is very short (for example, 2 seconds). That is, in the auxiliary game state, when the game ball passes through the gate 15 or the gate 16, a normal symbol determination is performed, and it is a hit with a relatively high probability, and the second starting opening 12 is opened 1.8 seconds×3 times. It becomes easy to win the game balls. Further, in the auxiliary game state, compared to the non-auxiliary game state, the variation time of the special symbol is shortened.

On the other hand, the non-auxiliary gaming state has a relatively low probability of being determined as a hit in the normal symbol determination as compared with the auxiliary gaming state (for example, 1/50), and when it is determined as a hit in the ordinary symbol determination. The opening time of the electric tulip 17 is relatively short (for example, 0.1 seconds×1 time), and the variation time of the normal symbol is relatively long (for example, 25 seconds). That is, in the non-auxiliary gaming state, even if the game ball passes through the gate 15 or the gate 16 and the normal symbol determination is performed, the probability of winning is relatively low, and the second starting opening 12 is 0.1 seconds× Since the game ball is only opened once, it is difficult for the game ball to enter the second starting opening 12.

In this embodiment, at the end of the jackpot game, the gaming machine 1 is set to the high-probability gaming state or the low-probability gaming state, and is set to the auxiliary gaming state or the non-auxiliary gaming state.

The low-probability gaming state and the non-auxiliary gaming state are called "normal gaming state", and the pachinko gaming machine 1 is initially set to the normal gaming state. Further, the high-probability game state and the auxiliary game state are called "probability variation game state". Further, the low-probability game state and the auxiliary game state are referred to as "time saving game state".

[Direction mode]
In the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the effect is performed in any one of the three effect modes corresponding to the current game state except during the big hit game. Specifically, for example, the normal mode when the game is controlled in the normal gaming state, the probability variation mode when the game is controlled in the probability variation gaming state, the time saving mode when the game is controlled in the time saving gaming state. The production is done respectively.

The normal mode has a plurality of presentation modes (stages, such as stage A and stage B). The stage itself does not show the possibility of a big hit, and each production (notice production, reach production, hit notification, etc.) described below can be executed in any of the normal modes of the stage A and the stage B.

[Main processing by game control unit 100]
Next, the main processing executed by the game control unit 100 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 5 is a flowchart showing an example of main processing executed by the game control unit 100. The game control unit 100 repeats the series of processes shown in FIG. 5 at regular time intervals (for example, 4 milliseconds) by interruption during normal operation except for special cases such as power-on and power-off. Execute. The processing of the game control unit 100, which will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIG. 5 and subsequent figures, is performed by the CPU 101 executing a program stored in the ROM 102.

First, the CPU 101 of the game control unit 100 executes random number update processing for updating various random numbers such as jackpot random number, symbol random number, reach random number, variation pattern random number, and normal symbol random number (step S1). The jackpot random number is a random number for determining whether the result of the special symbol determination is a jackpot or a loss. The symbol random number is a random number for determining a jackpot symbol (type of jackpot) when the result of the special symbol determination is a jackpot. The reach random number is a random number for determining whether or not to select a fluctuation pattern of a predetermined fluctuation time (for example, 13 seconds) or more when the result of the special symbol determination is a loss. The variation pattern random number is a random number for determining a variation pattern (variation time) when the special symbol is variably displayed. The normal symbol random number is a random number for determining the winning or losing of the ordinary symbol lottery. The jackpot random number, the pattern random number, the reach random number, the variation pattern random number, and the normal pattern random number are generated by, for example, a random number generator each time the process of step S1 is performed.

Subsequent to step S1, the CPU 101 executes a starting opening switch (SW) process (step S2). In the starting port switch process, the CPU 101 monitors whether or not a detection signal is input from the first starting port switch 111 or the second starting port switch 112, and updates each random number (big hit random number, Regarding the pattern random number, the reach random number, and the variation pattern random number), the value at the time when the detection signal is input is acquired and stored in the RAM 103. This start opening switch process will be described later in detail with reference to FIG.

Following step S2, the CPU 101 executes gate switch (SW) processing (step S3). In the gate switch process, the CPU 101 monitors whether or not the detection signal is input from the gate switch 114 or 115, and if the detection signal is input, acquires the value of the normal symbol random number updated in the process of step S1. And store it in the RAM 103. This gate switch process will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. 7.

Following step S3, the CPU 101 executes special symbol processing (step S4). Although details will be described later, in the special symbol processing, whether or not the result of the special symbol determination is a big hit, the big hit symbol in the case of a big hit is determined. Further, the CPU 101 executes the special symbol determination by using the random number acquired in the starting mouth switch process of step S2, and variably displays the special symbol on the first special symbol display device 41 or the second special symbol display device 42. The special symbol indicating the result of the special symbol determination is stopped and displayed. The special symbol processing will be described later in detail with reference to FIG.

Subsequent to step S4, the CPU 101 executes normal symbol processing (step S5). In the normal symbol processing, the CPU 101 executes the normal symbol determination using the normal symbol random number obtained in the gate switch process of step S3, and normally displays the normal symbol on the normal symbol display 45 in a variable manner, and then the result of the normal symbol determination. The normal pattern indicating is stopped and displayed. The normal symbol processing will be described later in detail with reference to FIG.

Subsequent to step S5, when the special symbol determination in the special symbol processing of step S4 results in a big hit, the CPU 101 executes a special winning opening process for opening and closing the special winning opening 13 via the special winning opening control unit 117. (Step S6). The special winning opening process will be described later in detail with reference to FIG.

Following step S6, the CPU 101 executes electric tulip processing (step S7). In the electric tulip process, the CPU 101 operates the pair of blade members of the electric tulip 17 via the electric tulip opening/closing unit 113 when the ordinary symbol lottery in the ordinary symbol process of step S5 is won. The electric tulip process will be described later in detail with reference to FIG.

Following step S7, the CPU 101 executes prize ball processing for controlling the number of winning game balls and controlling the payout of prize balls according to the prize (step S8). Specifically, when the game ball wins any of the first starting opening 11, the second starting opening 12, the large winning opening 13, and the normal winning opening 14, the CPU 101 awards the number of prizes according to the winning place. Give out the ball. For example, the CPU 101 pays out three prize balls when a game ball is won in the first starting opening 11 or the second starting opening 12, and fifteen prize balls when a game ball is winning in the big winning opening 13. Pay out.

Following step S8, the CPU 101 executes output processing (step S9). In the output process of step S9, the CPU 101 transmits various commands set in the RAM 103 to the effect control unit 130 by the starting mouth switch process of step S2, the special symbol process of step S4, the special winning opening process of step S6, and the like.

[Starting switch processing by the game control unit 100]
Next, with reference to FIG. 6, details of the starting opening switch process executed in the game control unit 100 will be described. FIG. 6 is a detailed flowchart of the starting opening switch process in step S2 of FIG.

As shown in FIG. 6, in step S201, the CPU 101 of the game control unit 100 determines whether or not the first start port switch 111 has been turned “ON” (whether or not a game ball has won the first start port 11). To judge. When it is determined that the first starting port switch 111 has been turned “ON” (step S201: YES), the number of reserved U1 of the first special symbol determination stored in the RAM 103 is the first special stored in the ROM 102 in advance. It is determined whether or not it is less than the maximum holding number Umax1 (for example, 4) of the symbol determination (step S202).

When the CPU 101 determines that the number U1 of reservations is less than the maximum number Umax1 of reservations (step S202: YES), the value of the number U1 of reservations is updated to a value obtained by adding “1” (step S203). Then, the CPU 101 acquires values of various random numbers (big hit random number, design random number, reach random number, and variation pattern random number) updated by the process of step S1 and stores them in the RAM 103 (step S204).

Here, by storing various random numbers acquired in response to the game ball winning the first start opening 11 in the RAM 103, the first special symbol related to the hold ball that has increased the hold number U1 in step S203. The decision right will be withheld. Although the details will be described later, the right of the first special symbol determination that has been held is digested in the special symbol processing of step S4, and the first special symbol is variably displayed and is stopped and displayed after a predetermined time elapses. The result of the first special symbol determination is notified.

Subsequently, the CPU 101 executes a preliminary determination process based on the various random numbers stored in the RAM 103 in step S204 (step S205). The pre-determination process of step S205 is a process for determining the right of the first special symbol determination that has been held, and determines whether or not it is a jackpot, a jackpot symbol in the case of a jackpot, a variation pattern, and the like, and shows the determination result in advance. This is a process of generating determination information. After that, the CPU 101 sets a hold command including the preliminary determination information in the RAM 103 (step S206). The hold command set in step S206 is a command for notifying that the first special symbol determination has been held, and is transmitted to the effect control unit 130 in the output process in step S9 of FIG. In the preliminary determination process of step S205, the various random numbers acquired in step S204 may be directly generated as the preliminary determination information, and the preliminary determination information may be included in the hold command.

When determining “NO” in step S201, determining “NO” in step S202, or executing the process of step S206, the CPU 101 executes the process of step S207. In step S207, the CPU 101 determines whether or not the second starting opening switch 112 has been turned "ON" (whether or not a game ball has won the second starting opening 12). When it is determined that the second starting opening switch 112 has been turned “ON” (step S207: YES), the number U2 of reservations for the second special symbol determination stored in the RAM 103 is the second special stored in the ROM 102 in advance. It is determined whether or not it is less than the maximum pending number Umax2 (for example, 4) of the symbol determination (step S208).

When the CPU 101 determines that the number U2 of reservations is less than the maximum number Umax2 of reservations (step S208: YES), the value of the number U2 of reservations is updated to a value obtained by adding “1” (step S209). Then, the CPU 101 acquires various random numbers (big hit random number, design random number, reach random number, and variation pattern random number) updated in the process of step S1 and stores them in the RAM 103 (step S210).

Then, the CPU 101 uses the various random numbers stored in the RAM 103 by the process of step S210 to perform the preliminary determination process in the same manner as the process of step S205 (step S211), and stores the hold command including the preliminary determination information in the RAM 103. Set (step S212).

If "NO" is determined in step S207, "NO" is determined in step S208, or if the process of step S212 is performed, the CPU 101 ends the starting port switch process and the gate switch process. Proceed to.

[Gate switch processing by game control unit 100]
FIG. 7 is a detailed flowchart of the gate switch process in step S3 of FIG. As shown in FIG. 7, the CPU 101 determines whether the detection signal from the gate switch 114 or 115 (an ON signal indicating that the gate switch 114 or 115 is “ON”) is input or not. It is determined whether the switch 114 or 115 has been turned "ON" (step S301).

When the CPU 101 determines that the gate switch 114 or 115 has been turned “ON” (step S301: YES), the number of holdings G of the normal symbol determination stored in the RAM 103 is the maximum number of holdings Gmax of the normal symbol determination (for example, 4) is less than or equal to 4) (step S302).

When the CPU 101 determines that the number of reservations G is less than the maximum number of reservations Gmax (step S302: YES), it updates the value of the number of reservations G by "1" (step S303), and the process is normally held. A normal symbol random number used for the symbol determination is acquired and stored in the RAM 103 (step S304). In addition, the pre-determination process is performed on the normal symbol random number stored in step S304 in the same manner as in step S205, and the result of the pre-determination process may be transmitted to the effect control unit 130 as a normal symbol suspension command. ..

[Special symbol processing by game control unit 100]
Next, with reference to FIGS. 8 to 11, details of the special symbol processing executed by the game control unit 100 will be described. FIG. 8 is a detailed flowchart showing the special symbol processing of step S4 in FIG. FIG. 9 is a flowchart showing details of the big hit determination process in step S407 of FIG. FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing details of the variation pattern setting process in step S408 of FIG.

As shown in FIG. 8, the CPU 101 of the game control unit 100 determines, for example, based on the information stored in the RAM 103 whether a special game is being played (big hit game is being played) (step S401). When it is determined that the special game is in progress (step S401: YES), the CPU 101 ends the special symbol process.

When determining that the special game is not in progress (step S401: NO), the CPU 101 determines whether or not the special symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol) is being variably displayed (step S402). When it is determined that the special symbol is not being variably displayed (step S402: NO), it is determined whether or not the number U2 of holding of the second special symbol determination stored in the RAM 103 is “1” or more (step S403). ), if it is determined that it is equal to or more than "1" (step S403: YES), the number U2 of holdings is subtracted by "1" and only one holding ball is consumed (step S404).

When the CPU 101 determines that the number of holdings U2 is not equal to or larger than "1" (the second special symbol determination is not held) (step S403: NO), the number of holdings of the first special symbol determination stored in the RAM 103 is held. It is determined whether or not U1 is "1" or more (step S405), and when it is determined that it is "1" or more (step S405: YES), the number of held U1 is subtracted by "1" and the number of held balls is set to 1. Digests only (step S406). On the other hand, when the CPU 101 determines in step S405 that the number U1 of reservations is not equal to or more than "1" (step S405: NO), it sets a customer waiting command in the RAM 103 and ends the special symbol processing shown in FIG.

CPU101 performs the jackpot determination process following the process of step S404 or step S406 (step S407). The jackpot determination process will be described below with reference to FIG. 9.

(Big hit determination process)
As shown in FIG. 9, the CPU 101 first determines whether or not it is a big hit (step S431). Specifically, when the CPU 101 determines whether or not it is a big hit following the process of step S404 of FIG. 8, the big hit random number (of step S2) related to the hold ball from which the hold number U2 is subtracted in the process of step S404. It is determined whether or not the jackpot random number stored in the RAM 103 in the process matches the winning value of the jackpot random number previously stored in the ROM 102. Thereby, the CPU 101 determines whether or not the result of the second special symbol determination is a big hit. When the gaming state is the high-probability gaming state, the probability of being determined as a big hit is higher than that in the low-probability gaming state. On the other hand, when determining whether or not to be a jackpot after the processing of step S406 of FIG. 8, the CPU 101 determines the jackpot random number (the RAM 103 in the processing of step S2) related to the holding balls from which the holding number U1 is subtracted in the processing of step S406. It is determined whether or not the jackpot random number stored in (4) matches the winning value of the jackpot random number stored in advance in the ROM 102. Thereby, the CPU 101 determines whether or not the result of the first special symbol determination is a big hit.

Here, when the result of the special symbol determination is a big hit (step S431: YES), the CPU 101 determines the symbol random number based on the symbol random number stored in the RAM 103 in the process of step S2 together with the jackpot random number described above. Is performed (step S432). Specifically, the CPU 101 determines whether the symbol random number stored in the RAM 103 in the process of step S2 matches any of the random number values assigned to the respective jackpot symbols stored in advance in the ROM 102. The jackpot pattern is determined by. Then, the CPU 101 sets the determined jackpot pattern in the RAM 103 as setting information (step S433).

On the other hand, when it is determined in step S431 that the jackpot is not a big hit (step S431: NO), the CPU 101 sets a lost symbol indicating that the result of the special symbol determination is a loss in the RAM 103 as setting information (step S434).

After the processing of step S433 or the processing of step S434, the CPU 101 ends the jackpot determination processing and returns the processing to the special symbol processing of FIG.

Returning to FIG. 8, following the jackpot determination process of step S407, the CPU 101 executes a variation pattern setting process (step S408). Hereinafter, the variation pattern setting process will be described with reference to FIG.

As shown in FIG. 10, the CPU 101 determines whether or not a probability variation game flag, which will be described later, is ON, that is, whether or not it is in a high-probability game state (step S461). When the probability variation game flag is OFF (step S461: NO), the CPU 101 determines whether or not an auxiliary game flag described later is ON, that is, whether or not it is an auxiliary game state (step S462). When the auxiliary game flag is OFF (step S462: NO), the CPU 101 sets a normal table in the RAM 103 as a variation pattern table (step S463). When the auxiliary game flag is ON (step S462: YES), the CPU 101 sets a time saving table in the RAM 103 as a variation pattern table (step S464).

On the other hand, when the probability variation game flag is ON (step S461: YES), the CPU 101 sets the probability variation table as a variation pattern table in the RAM 103 (step S466).

The variation pattern table is a table that predefines conditions for determining the variation pattern (variation time) of the special symbol. Each fluctuation pattern table contains a plurality of fluctuation patterns. When the jackpot determination result is a jackpot, it is a jackpot variation pattern, when there is a loss and there is no reach. (For example, 13 seconds) If the variation pattern is not selected to select a variation pattern (13 seconds or more) (no reach), and if there is a loss and there is a reach (a predetermined variation time using a reach random number (for example, reach) 13 seconds) and a reach variation pattern selected when it is decided to select a variation pattern of 13 seconds or more). For example, the jackpot variation patterns included in the normal table include variation patterns of 30 seconds, 60 seconds, 80 seconds, 120 seconds, etc., and the reach variation patterns included in the ordinary table include variation time of 27 seconds. , 57 seconds, 75 seconds, 113 seconds, and the like. Further, as the loss variation pattern included in the normal table, there are variation patterns in which the variation time is 8 seconds, 12 seconds, and the like. Further, in the time reduction table and the probability variation table, there is a variation pattern shorter than the variation variation pattern in the normal table (for example, variation time is 2 seconds) as the variation variation pattern. An example of the variation pattern table of the normal table will be described later with reference to FIG.

Following the processing of step S463, step S464, or step S465, the CPU 101 determines whether or not the result of the jackpot determination of step S407 is a loss (step S466). If the result of this jackpot determination is not lost, that is, if it is a jackpot (step S466: NO), the CPU 101 advances the process to the next step 468.

When it is determined that the result of the jackpot determination in step S407 is a loss (step S466: YES), the CPU 101 performs reach random number determination processing (step S467). In the reach random number determination process, the CPU 101 determines whether to select a reach variation pattern having a predetermined variation time (for example, 13 seconds) or more based on the obtained reach random number. Then, the CPU 101 executes the process of step S468 subsequent to the process of step S467.

In step S468, the CPU 101 performs a fluctuation pattern random number determination process. Specifically, the CPU 101 uses the set variation pattern table to select a variation pattern based on the variation pattern random number stored in the RAM 103 in the process of step S2. More specifically, the CPU 101 determines a fluctuation pattern in which the fluctuation pattern random number stored in the RAM 103 in the process of step S2 matches the value set for each fluctuation pattern included in the set fluctuation pattern table.

In this way, the CPU 101 determines the variation pattern of the special symbol based on the variation pattern random number acquired in step S2 and the variation pattern table set in step S463, step S464, or step S465. The determined fluctuation pattern is set in the RAM 103 as setting information (step S469). After the processing of step S469, the CPU 101 ends the fluctuation pattern setting processing shown in FIG. 10, and advances the processing of step S409 and subsequent steps of FIG.

Returning to FIG. 8, following the processing of step S408, the CPU 101 shows the setting information of the symbol set in the processing of step S407, the setting information of the variation pattern set in the processing of step S408, and the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1. A fluctuation start command including information and the like is generated and set in the RAM 103 (step S409). This variation start command is a command for instructing the execution of the effect accompanying the variable display of the special symbol, and is transmitted to the effect control unit 130 by executing the output process of step S9 of FIG.

Following the processing of step S409, the CPU 101 starts the variable display of the special symbol based on the setting information included in the variation start command set in the processing of step S409 (step S410), and measures the variation time. It starts (step S411). In addition, the variable display of the special symbol is performed by using the second special symbol display device 42 when the processing of steps S407 to S409 is performed subsequent to the processing of step S404, and following the processing of step S406. When it is performed, it is performed using the first special symbol display 41.

When the CPU 101 determines “YES” in the process of step S402 or executes the process of step S411, the CPU 101 changes from the start of measurement of the change time in step S411 to the change pattern corresponding to the change pattern set in the process of step S408. It is determined whether time has elapsed (step S412).

When the CPU 101 determines that the variation time has elapsed (step S412: YES), it sets a variation stop command for notifying that the variation display of the special symbol is stopped in the RAM 103 (step S413), and in the process of step S410. The variation display of the started special symbol is ended (step S414), and the measured variation time is reset (step S415). Thereby, in the first special symbol display device 41 or the second special symbol display device 42, the symbol (big hit symbol or lost symbol) corresponding to the determination result of the jackpot determination process in step S407 is stopped and displayed, and the special symbol determination is performed. The result is notified. The fluctuation stop command set in the process of step S413 is transmitted to the effect control unit 130 by executing the output process of step S9 of FIG.

After the processing of step S415, the CPU 101 executes processing during stop (step S416). Details of the processing during suspension will be described later.

If “YES” is determined in step S401, “NO” is determined in step S405, “NO” is determined in step S412, or the process of step S416 is performed, the CPU 101 The special symbol process is ended, and the normal symbol process of step S5 of FIG. 5 is executed.

[Processing during stop by game control unit 100]
Next, the processing during stoppage in step S416 of FIG. 8 will be described. FIG. 11 is a detailed flowchart showing the in-stop processing of step S416 of FIG.

As shown in FIG. 11, the CPU 101 determines whether or not the result of the special symbol determination is a jackpot based on the result of the jackpot determination process of step S407 (step S480). When the CPU 101 determines that it is a big hit (step S480: YES), it sets the big hit game flag stored in the RAM 103 to "ON" (step S481).

Following the process of step S481, the CPU 101 sets the auxiliary game flag and the probability variation game flag stored in the RAM 103 to “OFF” (step S482). Following the processing of step S482, the CPU 101 starts the opening (step S483), and sets the opening command in the RAM 103 (step S484). This opening command is a command for causing the effect control unit 130 to perform an opening effect indicating that the jackpot game is started, and the command is effect control by executing the output process of step S9 of FIG. It is transmitted to the unit 130.

On the other hand, when the CPU 101 determines that it is not a big hit (step S480: NO), it determines whether or not the auxiliary game flag is set to "ON" (step S485). When it is determined that the auxiliary game flag is set to "ON" (step S485: YES), the auxiliary game remaining number J stored in the RAM 103 is subtracted by "1" and the J is updated (step S486). .. The auxiliary game residual number J indicates the number of fluctuations of the remaining special symbols (the number of executions of special symbol determination) in which the auxiliary game state is maintained, and is set in the game state setting process executed after the jackpot game is performed. .. Details of the game state setting process will be described later.

Following the processing of step S486, the CPU 101 determines whether or not the auxiliary game residual count J is "0" (step S487). When it is determined that the auxiliary game remaining number J is "0" (step S487: YES), the CPU 101 sets the auxiliary game flag to "OFF" (step S488).

When the process of step S488 is executed, when it is determined that the auxiliary game flag is not "ON" (step S485: NO), or when it is determined that the auxiliary game residual number J is not "0" (step S487: NO) ), the CPU 101 determines whether or not the probability variation game flag is set to "ON" (step S489).

When it is determined that the probability variation game flag is set to "ON" (step S489: YES), the CPU 101 subtracts "1" from the high-probability game residual count X stored in the RAM 103, and updates the X. (Step S490). The high-probability game remaining number X indicates the remaining number of times the special symbol determination is performed in the high-probability game state, and is set in the game state setting process (described later) executed after the jackpot game is performed.

Following the processing of step S490, the CPU 101 determines whether or not the high-probability game residual count X is “0” (step S491). When it is determined that the high-probability game residual count X is "0" (step S491: YES), the probability variation game flag stored in the RAM 103 is set to "OFF" (step S492).

When the process of step S492 is executed, when the process of step S484 is executed, when it is determined that the probability variation game flag is not "ON" (step S489: NO), or the high-probability game residual count X is " When it is determined that it is not "0" (step S491: NO), the CPU 101 ends the processing during stop of FIG.

[Ordinary symbol processing by the game control unit 100]
Next, with reference to FIG. 12, details of the normal symbol process executed by the game control unit 100 will be described. FIG. 12 is a detailed flowchart showing the normal symbol process of step S5 of FIG.

First, the CPU 101 of the game control unit 100 determines whether the auxiliary flag stored in the RAM 103 is set to "ON" (step S501). The auxiliary flag is a flag that is set to "ON" when the result of the normal symbol determination is a hit, and is a flag indicating whether or not the hit game for operating the electric tulip 17 is in progress. The electric tulip 17 operates in a predetermined pattern when the result of the normal symbol determination is a hit. The operation pattern of the electric tulip 17 differs depending on whether or not the gaming machine 1 is in the auxiliary game state (whether or not the auxiliary game flag is ON). When it is determined that the auxiliary flag is set to “ON” (step S501: YES), the CPU 101 ends the normal symbol process of FIG.

When it is determined that the auxiliary flag is not set to “ON” (step S501: NO), the CPU 101 determines whether or not the normal symbol display unit 45 is in the variable display of the normal symbol (step S502), When it is determined that the variable display of the normal symbol is not being displayed (step S502: NO), it is determined whether or not the number of reserved symbols G for the normal symbol determination stored in the RAM 103 is "1" or more (step S503). When it is determined that the number G of reservations is not equal to or more than "1" (step S503: NO), the CPU 101 ends the normal symbol processing of FIG.

When the CPU 101 determines that the number of reservations G is “1” or more (step S503: YES), the number of reservations G is updated by subtracting “1” (step S504), and the normal symbol random number determination process is executed. (Step S505). Specifically, the normal symbol random number acquired in the process of step S3 in response to the game ball passing through the first gate 15 or the second gate 16, the winning value of the normal symbol random number stored in the ROM 102. It is determined whether or not the result of the normal symbol determination is a hit based on whether or not it matches (step S506). In the auxiliary game state, the winning value of the normal symbol random number is set more than in the non-auxiliary game state, and in the auxiliary game state, the result of the normal symbol determination is a hit. The probability of becoming is higher than in the non-auxiliary gaming state.

When the CPU 101 determines that the result of the normal symbol determination is not a hit (step S506: NO), it sets the lost symbol in the RAM 103 (step S507).

On the other hand, when the CPU 101 determines that the result of the normal symbol determination is a hit (step S506: YES), the CPU 101 sets the winning symbol in the RAM 103 (step S508).

Following the processing of step S507 or the processing of step S508, the CPU 101 determines whether or not it is in the auxiliary game state based on whether or not the auxiliary game flag stored in the RAM 103 is ON (step S509).

When the CPU 101 determines that it is not in the auxiliary game state (step S509: NO), it sets the normal symbol variation time, which is the time for varying and displaying the ordinary symbol on the ordinary symbol display device 45, for example, to 25 seconds (step S510). On the contrary, when it is determined that it is in the auxiliary game state (step S509: YES), the normal symbol variation time is set to a relatively short value, for example, 2 seconds (step S511). The normal symbol variation time set by the process of step S510 or step S511 is temporarily stored in the RAM 103.

Subsequent to the processing of step S510 or step S511, the CPU 101 starts the variable display of the normal symbol on the normal symbol display device 45 (step S512), and starts measuring the elapsed time from the start of the variable display (step S513). ..

On the other hand, when the CPU 101 determines that the normal symbols are being displayed in a variable manner on the normal symbol display device 45 (step S502: YES), it determines whether or not to end the variable display of the normal symbols (step S516). Specifically, based on whether or not the elapsed time when the measurement is started by the process of step S513 has reached the normal symbol change time set by the process of step S512 or step S513, the variable display of the normal symbol is displayed. It is determined whether the end timing has come. When it is determined that the end timing has not come (step S516: NO), the CPU 101 ends the normal symbol processing of FIG.

When the CPU 101 determines that the end timing of the variable display of the normal symbol has come (step S516: YES), it ends the variable display of the normal symbol by the normal symbol display device 45 (step S517). Specifically, the CPU 101 causes the ordinary symbol display device 45 to stop and display the symbol set in the process of step S507 or step S508. As a result, the result of the normal symbol determination is notified.

Following the process of step S517, the CPU 101 resets the elapsed time when the measurement was started by the process of step S515 (step S518). Then, similarly to step S506, it is determined whether or not the result of the normal symbol determination is a hit (step S519), and when it is determined to be a hit (step S519: YES), the auxiliary flag is turned “ON”. It is set (step S520). When the auxiliary flag is set to “ON” and the electric tulip process described later is performed, the electric tulip 17 operates.

When the process of step S520 is performed, the process of step S516 determines NO, or the process of step S519 determines NO, the CPU 101 ends the normal symbol process of FIG.

In addition, in the non-assistance game state, the long opening of the second starting port 12 is opened (for example, 5.6 seconds), and the short opening of the second starting port 12 is opened (for example, 0.1 seconds). There may be a hit.

[Winning prize processing by the game control unit 100]
Next, with reference to FIG. 13, details of the special winning opening process executed by the game control unit 100 will be described. FIG. 13 is a detailed flowchart showing the special winning opening process of step S6 of FIG. As shown in FIG. 13, the CPU 101 of the game control unit 100 determines whether the special game flag (big hit game flag) is ON (step S601). When the special game flag is ON (step S601: YES), the CPU 101 determines whether or not the opening is in progress (step S602). Here, it is determined whether or not the big hit game started in step S483 is being opened.

If it is during the opening (step S602: YES), the CPU 101 determines whether or not the opening time has elapsed (step S603). The opening time varies depending on the jackpot pattern. If the opening time has elapsed (step S603: YES), the CPU 101 sets "0" to R (indicating the number of rounds in the jackpot game) according to the result of the jackpot determination process, and the value of Rmax, The opening pattern (opening time, opening frequency, interval time, etc.) of the special winning opening 13 is set (step S604).

Here, the value of Rmax differs depending on the jackpot pattern. Although the details will be described later, the number of rounds differs depending on the jackpot symbol, and the CPU 101 sets Rmax indicating the number of rounds of the jackpot game according to the jackpot symbol.

Following step S604, the CPU 101 adds "1" to R and saves it in the RAM 103 (step S605). Next, the CPU 101 starts opening control of the special winning opening 13 based on the opening pattern set in step S604 (step S606), and sets a round start command indicating the start of the round in the RAM 103 (step S607). After the processing of step S607, the CPU 101 next executes the processing of step S611.

On the other hand, if it is not during the opening (step S602: NO), the CPU 101 determines whether it is during the ending (step S608). If the ending is in progress (step S608: YES), the CPU 101 next executes the process of step S617. If the ending is not in progress (step S608: NO), the CPU 101 determines whether or not it is in the interval between round games (step S609). If it is during the interval (step S609: YES), the CPU 101 determines whether or not the interval time has elapsed (step S610), and if it has elapsed (step S610: YES), then the process of step S605 is performed. Execute. When the interval time has not elapsed (step S610: NO), the CPU 101 ends the special winning opening process.

On the other hand, if the interval is not in progress (step S609: NO), that is, if the round game is in progress, the CPU 101 determines whether or not the round end condition is satisfied (step S611). When the round end condition is not satisfied (step S611: NO), the CPU 101 ends the special winning opening process.

For example, the round end condition of the long open round game described later is that, for example, 29.5 seconds have passed since the opening control of the special winning opening of this round was started in step S606, or the large end of this round is set in step S606. That is, the number of winnings to the large winning opening of the game ball after starting the opening control of the winning opening has reached a predetermined value. When any one of these two conditions is satisfied, the CPU 101 determines that the round end condition is satisfied.

When the round end condition is satisfied (step S611: YES), the CPU 101 ends the control for opening the special winning opening in this round (step S612). Subsequently, the CPU 101 sets a round end command (step S613). This round end command is transmitted to the effect control unit 130 by executing the output process of step S9 of FIG.

Subsequently, the CPU 101 determines whether R is equal to Rmax (step S614). That is, the CPU 101 determines whether the current round is equal to the maximum round number set in step S604.

When determining that R is not equal to Rmax (step S614: NO), the CPU 101 starts measuring the interval time (step S615), and then ends the special winning opening process.

When it is determined that R is equal to Rmax (step S614: YES), the CPU 101 starts ending (step S616) and sets an ending command in the RAM 103 (step S617).

When the CPU 101 performs the process of step S617 or determines YES in the process of step S608, the CPU 101 determines whether or not a preset ending time has elapsed after starting the ending in step S616 (step S618). If the ending time has elapsed (step S618: YES), the CPU 101 determines whether or not the jackpot game flag is ON, that is, whether or not the special game this time is the jackpot game (step S619). When the jackpot game flag is ON, the CPU 101 executes a game state setting process (step S620). Details of the game state setting process will be described later. When the game state setting process of step S620 is executed or when NO is determined in step S619, the CPU 101 sets the special game flag (big hit game flag) to OFF (step S621).

If NO in the process of step S601, NO in the process of step S611, NO in the process of step S618, NO in the process of step S610, NO in the process of step S603. If it is determined that the process of step S615 is executed or the process of step S621 is executed, the CPU 101 ends the special winning opening process shown in FIG.

[Game state setting process by game control unit 100]
Next, the game state setting process of step S620 of FIG. 13 will be described. FIG. 14 is a detailed flowchart showing the game state setting process of step S620 of FIG.

As shown in FIG. 14, the CPU 101 determines whether or not the type of the big hit this time is a probability variation big hit accompanied by the transition to the high-probability gaming state (step S630). Specifically, the CPU 101 determines whether or not it is a probability variation jackpot based on the symbol set in the jackpot determination process. When it is a probability variation jackpot (step S630: YES), the CPU 101 sets the probability variation game flag and the auxiliary game flag to ON (step S631), sets Xmax in the high-probability game residual count X, and the auxiliary game residual count. Jmax is set to J (step S632). Xmax and Jmax are predetermined values, and a very large value such as 10000 is set as Xmax and Jmax. Since a very large value Xmax is set for X, the game is controlled in the high-probability game state until the next big hit.

When the process of step S632 is performed or when NO is determined in step S630, the CPU 101 determines whether or not the big hit of this time is a normal big hit accompanied by the shift to the time saving game state (step S633). When determining YES in step S633, the CPU 101 sets the auxiliary game flag to ON (step S634). Subsequently, the CPU 101 sets, for example, "100" in the auxiliary game remaining number J (step S635).

When the process of step S635 is performed or when it is determined as NO in step S633, the CPU 101 ends the game state setting process shown in FIG.

[Electric tulip processing by the game control unit 100]
Next, details of the electric tulip process in step S7 of FIG. 5 will be described. FIG. 15 is a detailed flowchart of the electric tulip process of FIG.

First, the CPU 101 of the game control unit 100 determines whether or not the auxiliary flag is set to "ON" (step S701). When it is determined that the auxiliary flag is not set to "ON" (step S701: NO), the CPU 101 ends the electric tulip process.

When determining that the auxiliary flag is set to "ON" (step S701: YES), the CPU 101 determines whether or not the electric tulip 17 is in operation (step S702). When it is determined that the electric tulip 17 is not in operation (step S702: NO), the CPU 101 determines whether or not the auxiliary game flag is ON, thereby determining whether or not the auxiliary game state is set (step S703).

When the CPU 101 determines that it is not in the auxiliary game state (step S703: NO), for example, it sets an operation pattern in which the operation of opening the second starting opening 12 for 0.1 second is performed once in the RAM 103 (step S704).

On the other hand, when the CPU 101 determines that it is in the auxiliary game state (step S703: YES), the operation pattern of the electric tulip 17 is, for example, an operation pattern of opening the second starting opening 12 for 1.8 seconds three times. It is set in the RAM 103 (step S705).

After setting the operation pattern of the electric tulip 17 by the processing of step S704 or step S705, the CPU 101 causes the electric tulip opening/closing unit 113 to start the operation of the electric tulip 17 in the set operation pattern (step S706).

When the CPU 101 executes the process of step S706 or determines that the electric tulip 17 is in operation (step S702: YES), whether or not the operation of the electric tulip 17 started in the process of step S706 is completed. It is determined (step S707). When determining that the operation of the electric tulip 17 is completed (step S707: YES), the CPU 101 sets the auxiliary flag stored in the RAM 103 to “OFF” (step S708).

When the process of step S701 determines NO, the process of step S707 determines NO, or the process of step S708 is executed, the CPU 101 ends the electric tulip process.

[Type of jackpot]
Next, the jackpot pattern (type of jackpot) selected when the result of the special game determination is a jackpot will be described. FIG. 16 is a diagram showing the details of the jackpot symbols selected according to the winning of each starting opening, and is a diagram showing the contents of the jackpot game corresponding to each symbol.

As shown in FIG. 16, when a game ball wins the first starting opening 11 and becomes a big hit, any one of the big hit symbols Z1 to big hit symbols Z3 is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display device 41. The jackpot game (a kind of special game) corresponding to each jackpot pattern is performed. In addition, when the game ball wins the second starting opening 12 and becomes a jackpot, any of the jackpot symbols Z4 to jackpot symbols Z6 is stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display 42, and each jackpot symbol. A jackpot game (a kind of special game) is played according to.

Specifically, when the jackpot is determined based on the winning in the first starting opening 11, the jackpot symbol Z1 is selected at a rate of 15% and the jackpot symbol Z2 is selected at a rate of 50% as the jackpot symbol. The jackpot symbol Z3 is selected at a rate of 35%.

When the jackpot pattern Z1 is selected, as a jackpot game, a predetermined round end condition (for example, until the number of winning game balls to the jackpot 13 reaches 10 or after the jackpot 13 is opened). Until 29.5 seconds have elapsed), a long open round game in which the special winning opening 13 is opened is played 10 times (10 rounds (denoted as “R”)). For example, in the 10R jackpot game, about 1,500 game balls are paid out as prize balls. When the big hit symbol Z2 is selected, a long open round game of 4R is performed as a big hit game. After the jackpot symbol Z1 or the jackpot symbol Z2 is selected and the jackpot game is performed, the gaming machine 1 shifts to the probability variation gaming state (high-probability gaming state and auxiliary gaming state), and the probability variation game is substantially up to the next jackpot. The state continues.

The jackpot by the jackpot pattern Z1 is called "10R certainty variation jackpot", and the jackpot by the jackpot symbol Z2 is called "4R certainty variation jackpot".

Further, when the big hit symbol Z3 is selected, a long open round game of 4R is performed. After the jackpot pattern Z3 is selected and the jackpot game is played, the gaming machine 1 shifts to a low-probability gaming state and an auxiliary gaming state (time saving gaming state). The time saving game state continues until the special symbol changes 100 times, and when the 100th variation of the special symbol ends, the gaming machine 1 is returned to the normal game state. In addition, the jackpot by the jackpot symbol Z3 may be referred to as "4R normal jackpot".

On the other hand, when the jackpot is determined based on the winning in the second starting opening 12, the jackpot pattern Z4 is selected at a rate of 40%, the jackpot pattern Z5 is selected at a rate of 25%, and the jackpot is at a rate of 35%. The symbol Z6 is selected.

When the big hit symbol Z4 or Z5 is selected, after the big hit game, it shifts to the probability variation game state. The probability variation gaming state continues substantially until the next jackpot. On the other hand, if the big hit symbol Z6 is selected, it shifts to the time saving game state after the big hit game, and the time saving game state continues until the special symbol changes 100 times.

The jackpot symbol Z4 is a symbol showing the 10R probability variation jackpot, and is a jackpot in which a long open round game of 10R is performed. The jackpot symbol Z5 is a symbol showing the 4R certainty variation jackpot, and is a jackpot in which a long open round game of 4R is performed. Further, the jackpot symbol Z6 is a symbol showing a 4R normal jackpot.

(Explanation of fluctuation production and reach production)
Here, the variation effect and the reach effect will be described. "Variation effect" is an effect that is performed during the change of the special symbol (the first special symbol or the second special symbol), which is started in response to the change of the special symbol and ended in accordance with the change of the special symbol. Is a production. The variation effect includes an effect using a decorative pattern displayed on the screen of the liquid crystal display device 5 (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as “liquid crystal screen 5”), an effect using another image, and a sound output from the speaker 24. It includes an effect using, an effect using the movable accessory 7, an effect using the board lamp 25 and the frame lamp 37, and an effect using the effect button 26.

The “reach effect” is an effect that uses a decorative pattern displayed on the liquid crystal screen 5, and is an effect that makes the player expect a jackpot. As will be described later in detail, the liquid crystal screen 5 displays a decorative symbol that changes in response to the start of variation of the special symbol and stops in response to the end of variation of the special symbol. The decorative symbol is a display (corresponding display) corresponding to the variable display of the special symbol that is being executed. Depending on the stop mode of the decorative symbol, whether the result of the special symbol determination is a big hit or a loss is notified. Specifically, on the liquid crystal screen 5, three decorative symbols, that is, left, middle, and right, are displayed.

In response to the start of variation of the special symbol, three decorative symbols start to vary, and three decorative symbols of the same type are stopped together (for example, "777" or "444"), it means that the jackpot has been notified. .. In addition, a state in which three decorative patterns of the same type are arranged is referred to as "double eye" or "symbol matching". On the other hand, if the three decorative patterns of the same kind are stopped without being aligned, basically the loss is notified. The reach effect is an effect that causes the player to expect that the three decorative patterns of the same kind are prepared.

For example, the reach effect is an effect in which decorative patterns of the same kind are temporarily stopped on the left and right, and the decorative pattern fluctuates in the middle area, and a decorative pattern of the same kind as the temporarily stopped decorative pattern is stopped on the middle area. It is a production that makes people expect.

In the present embodiment, there are three types of reach effects: normal reach effects (hereinafter sometimes referred to as “N reach”), SP reach effects, and SPSP reach effects. The N reach effect is the one with the lowest possibility of being a big hit afterwards (also referred to as the degree of expectation or reliability) among the plurality of reach effects. For example, the degree of expectation of N reach production is 0.1% or less. As the N reach effect, there may be a plurality of N reach effects having different (or the same) effect times and/or expectations.

The SP reach production is a production with higher expectations than the N reach production, and is a reach production with a longer production time than the N reach production. For example, the expectation of SP reach production is 5 to 10%. There may be a plurality of SP reach effects as the SP reach effects. The degree of expectation of the jackpot may differ depending on the SP reach production, and the production time may also differ. The expectation may be increased as the production time of the SP reach production is longer.

The SPSP reach production is a production having a higher expectation than the SP reach production and a reach production having a longer production time than the SP reach production. For example, the expectation of SPSP reach production is 30 to 50%. There may be a plurality of SPSP reach effects as SPSP reach effects. Depending on each SPSP reach production, the degree of expectation of a jackpot may differ, and the production time may also differ. It may be configured such that the longer the production time of the SPSP reach production, the higher the degree of expectation.

(Aspect of decorative design)
Here, the aspect of the decorative pattern may change depending on the effect section in the variable effect. FIG. 17 is a diagram showing an example of a decorative design. FIG. 18 is a diagram showing an example of the aspect of the decorative symbol in the game state and each effect section.

The decorative pattern 55 includes, for example, a design for production represented by numbers “1” to “9”. In FIG. 17, as an example of the decorative symbol 55, a “1” symbol that is an odd symbol and a “4” symbol that is an even symbol are shown. As shown in FIG. 17, the decorative pattern 55 includes a character-present mode including a number image 552 and a character image 551 corresponding to the number, and a character-less mode including the number image 552 and not including the character image 551. There is. The numbers indicated by the decorative pattern 55 and the character images included in the decorative pattern 55 have a one-to-one correspondence. For example, the "1" symbol corresponds to the first character, and the "4" symbol corresponds to the fourth character.

As shown in FIG. 18, in the case of the normal game state, before the reach (the section from the start of the variation of the special symbol to the establishment of the reach), the size is "medium" (normal), and the decoration with the character exists. The design 55 is displayed. Further, during the N reach production after the reach is established, the decorative pattern 55 of the size “medium” and in the character present mode is displayed. In addition, when the variation of the special symbol ends without reaching, the aspect of the decorative symbol 55 is the size "medium" and the aspect with the character from the variation start to the variation stop of the special symbol. Is.

Further, as will be specifically described later, the SP reach effect may be performed after the N reach effect is performed. During this SP reach production, the aspect of the left and right decorative patterns 55 is changed to the size “small” and without character. The SP reach effect may be performed without the N reach effect being performed from the start of the variation of the decorative pattern 55. Also in this case, the aspect of the left and right decorative designs 55 during the SP reach effect is the size “small” and the character-less aspect.

Further, the SPSP reach effect may be performed after the SP reach effect is performed. The aspect of the left and right decorative patterns 55 in the SPSP reach effect is the size “small” and the aspect without character. The SPSP reach effect may be performed without the SP reach effect after the N reach effect is performed. Further, there may be a case where the SPSP reach production is performed without performing the N reach production and the SP reach production from the start of the variation of the decorative pattern 55. Also in this case, the aspect of the left and right decorative designs 55 during the SPSP reach effect is the size “small” and the character-less aspect.

After the SPSP reach effect, the winning notification (winning notification or loss notification) is performed. During the hit notification, the aspect of the decorative pattern 55 changes. Although the details will be described later, during a predetermined period during the hit notification (for example, during the first light emission effect described later), the decorative pattern 55 has a size of “large” and is displayed without a character. Further, the decorative pattern 55 is displayed in the size “medium” and in the character-less mode (or the character-present mode) except during the predetermined period during the hit notification. For example, when the special symbol is stopped and displayed, the decorative symbol 55 has a size of “medium” and is displayed in a character present mode. During the notification of loss, the decorative pattern 55 has a size of "medium" and is displayed in a character presence mode.

In addition, the winning notification (winning notification or loss notification) may be performed from the SP reach effect. Even when the hit notification is performed from the SP reach effect, the aspect of the decorative pattern 55 may change during the hit notification, as in the case of the winning notification from the SPSP reach effect.

On the other hand, in the case of the probability variation gaming state, before the reach, the decorative pattern 55 has a size of “medium” and is displayed in a character-less mode. Although the details will be described later, in the probability variation game state, the battle effect is executed when the reach is established. The battle effect is an effect that causes the player to expect whether or not the probability variation game state continues in the probability variation game state, or whether it becomes the probability variation game state in the time saving game state, and the ally character and the enemy character fight. It is a production. When a win effect in which a teammate character wins is performed in the battle effect in the probability variation gaming state or the time saving game state, the jackpot game is performed, and after the jackpot game, the probability variation gaming state is entered. On the other hand, when the defeat effect is performed in which the teammate character is defeated in the battle effect in the probability variation game state (or the time-saving game state), the jackpot game is performed, and the jackpot game is transitioned to the time-saving game state (or the time-saving game state continues To). As a result of the battle effect, a draw effect may be performed in which the teammate character and the enemy character draw. The draw effect is an effect indicating that the result of the special game determination is a loss, and is an effect indicating that the current game state continues.

During the battle production, the decorative pattern 55 has a size of “small” and is displayed in a mode without a character. The aspect of the decorative pattern 55 may change during the victory effect after the battle effect is performed. Specifically, during a predetermined period in the victory effect after the battle effect (for example, during the first light emission effect described later), the decorative pattern 55 has a size of “large” and is displayed in a character-less mode. In addition, except for the predetermined period in the winning effect, the decorative pattern 55 has a size of "medium" and is displayed in a character-less mode. For example, when the special symbol is stopped and displayed, the decorative symbol 55 has a size of "medium" and is displayed in a character-less mode. During the defeat production and the draw production after the battle production, the decorative pattern 55 is displayed in a size of "medium" and without a character.

(Example of fluctuation pattern)
Next, an example of a variation pattern table for selecting a variation pattern (variation time) of a special symbol will be described. First, the variation pattern of the special symbol in the normal game state will be described with reference to FIG.

FIG. 19 is a diagram showing an example of a variation pattern table used when selecting a variation pattern of a special symbol in the normal gaming state. FIG. 19A is a table used when the result of the special symbol determination is a big hit, and is a normal time big hit fluctuation pattern table used for selecting the big hit fluctuation pattern. FIG. 19B is a normal time reach fluctuation pattern table used for selecting the reach fluctuation pattern, and when the result of the special symbol determination is a loss, a fluctuation time of a predetermined time or more is determined by using a reach random number. Used when it is determined to select. FIG. 19C is a normal time lost variation pattern table used for selecting a lost variation pattern, and when the result of the special symbol determination is lost, the variation time of a predetermined time or more is determined by using a reach random number. It is used when it is determined not to select.

As shown in FIG. 19A, in the big hit variation pattern table, big hit variation pattern OP1 (variation time 30 seconds), OP2 (variation time 60 seconds), OP3 (variation time 80 seconds), OP4 ( Fluctuation time 120 seconds). When the variation pattern is selected based on the jackpot variation pattern table, the jackpot variation pattern OP1 is selected at a rate of 0.5%, the jackpot variation pattern OP2 is selected at a rate of 4.5%, and the jackpot variation pattern OP3 is selected. 20% is selected, and the jackpot variation pattern OP4 is selected at 75%.

When the jackpot variation pattern OP1 is selected, the effect control unit 130 performs the variation effect including the normal reach effect as the reach effect. Specifically, when the big hit variation pattern OP1 is selected, three decorative symbols start to vary in response to the variation start of the special symbol, and then the decorative symbols of the same kind are temporarily stopped on the left and right to perform the N reach effect. ..

Before the N reach effect is started (or after it is started), the pseudo variable effect (pseudo continuous) may be performed according to the change pattern. In this case, a plurality of fluctuation patterns are prepared in advance as a fluctuation pattern in which the fluctuation effect including the N reach effect and the pseudo fluctuation effect is performed. Here, the pseudo-relation is an effect in which at least one of the three decorative symbols 55 on the liquid crystal screen 5 is temporarily stopped and is changed again. The temporary stop is a state in which the decorative pattern 55 does not completely stop but slightly changes (for example, swings up and down). The case where the decorative pattern 55 does not change again may be referred to as “pseudo none”. Further, when the decorative pattern 55 re-changes once or more, the first re-change may be referred to as “pseudo 2” and the second re-change may be referred to as “pseudo 3”. The greater the number of pseudo runs, the higher the reliability of being a big hit later. For example, the pseudo variation effect (re-variation) may be performed one or more times before the reach is established (the decorative patterns 55 of the same kind are temporarily stopped on the left and right), and then the N reach effect may be started. In addition, the reach may be established without the pseudo variation effect being performed, then the pseudo variation effect may be performed one or more times, the reach may be established again, and the N reach effect may be started. In addition, before or after the reach is established, the pseudo variation effect is performed one or more times, then the reach is established, and then, one or more times of the pseudo variation effect is performed, the reach is established again, and the reach production is performed. May be done. It should be noted that the pseudo-repeating may be performed without temporarily stopping any of the three decorative symbols 55 on the liquid crystal screen 5. In this case, the image suggesting the pseudo-repeating is temporarily stopped on the liquid crystal screen 5 while the three decorative patterns 55 are changing, and the pseudo-repeating is started.

Further, as shown in FIG. 19A, when the big hit variation pattern OP2 is selected, the production control unit 130 produces a variation production including an SP reach production as a reach production. Specifically, when the big hit variation pattern OP2 is selected, the three decorative symbols 55 start varying in response to the variation start of the special symbol, the N reach effect is performed, and then the SP reach effect is performed. In addition, a plurality of variation patterns in which the variation effect including the SP reach effect is performed may be prepared, and the pseudo variation effect may be performed once or a plurality of times in the variation effect including the SP reach effect.

When the big hit variation pattern OP3 is selected, the production control unit 130 produces a variation production including a special production. Specifically, when the big hit variation pattern OP3 is selected, the three decorative symbols 55 start varying in response to the variation start of the special symbol, N reach production is performed, and then SP reach production is performed, and further. After that, a special effect is performed. The special effect is an effect that causes the player to expect a special symbol indicating a big hit to be stopped on the liquid crystal screen 5. Details of the special effect will be described later. In addition, a plurality of variation patterns in which the variation effect including the special effect is performed may be prepared, and the pseudo variation effect may be performed one or more times in the variation effect including the special effect.

Moreover, when the big hit variation pattern OP4 is selected, the variation control including the SPSP reach production is performed by the production control unit 130 as the reach production. Specifically, when the jackpot variation pattern OP4 is selected, the three decorative symbols 55 start to vary in response to the variation start of the special symbol, the N reach effect is performed, and then the SP reach effect is performed, and further. Then, SPSP reach production is performed. It should be noted that a plurality of fluctuation patterns in which the variation effect including the SPSP reach effect is performed may be prepared, and the pseudo variation effect may be performed one or more times in the variation effect including the SPSP reach effect.

Further, as shown in FIG. 19B, the reach variation pattern table includes a reach variation pattern RP1 (variation time 27 seconds), RP2 (variation time 57 seconds), RP3 (variation time 75 seconds), RP4 (variation time 113 seconds) is included. When a variation pattern is selected based on the reach variation pattern table, the reach variation pattern RP1 is selected at a rate of 50%, the reach variation pattern RP2 is selected at a rate of 25%, and the reach variation pattern RP3 is selected at a rate of 15%. And the reach variation pattern RP4 is selected at a rate of 10%.

When the reach variation pattern RP1 is selected, the production control unit 130 performs the variation production including the N reach production as the reach production. When the reach variation pattern RP2 is selected, the production control unit 130 performs the variation production including the SP reach production as the reach production. When the reach variation pattern RP3 is selected, the production control unit 130 produces a variation production including a special production. When the reach variation pattern RP4 is selected, the production control unit 130 performs the variation production including the SPSP reach production as the reach production.

Further, as shown in FIG. 19C, when the variation pattern is selected on the basis of the variation pattern table, when the value of the number U1 of reservations is “2” or less, the variation pattern HP1 (variation time 8 Sec) is selected with a probability of 80%, and the loss variation pattern HP2 (variation time of 12 seconds) is selected with a probability of 20%. Further, when the variation pattern is selected based on the variation pattern table, and the value of the number U1 of reservations is "3", the variation pattern HP3 (variation time of 3 seconds) is selected at a rate of 100%.

As described above, when the jackpot is determined, the SPSP reach effect is easily performed, and the N reach effect is difficult to be performed. Further, when it is determined that there is a loss, it is difficult to perform the SPSP reach effect, and it is easy to perform the N reach effect. Therefore, when the SPSP reach effect is performed, the jackpot is relatively likely to occur after that, and when the N reach effect is performed, the jackpot is less likely to occur after that. The degree of reliability with respect to N becomes higher in the order of N reach effect, SP reach effect, and SPSP reach effect.

Further, the jackpot variation pattern may include a variation pattern that does not include the reach effect. When such a variation pattern is selected, the hit effect in which the three jackpots 55 are aligned and the big hit is notified is performed without the reach effect. In the variable effect in which the hit effect is performed, the reach is established, the N reach effect is performed, and the screen suddenly switches and the three decorative symbols 55 are aligned in the symbol alignment or the movable accessory 7 is activated. The big hit may be notified by the effect.

Next, the variation pattern of the special symbol in the probability variation gaming state will be described with reference to FIG.

FIG. 20 is a diagram showing an example of a variation pattern table used when selecting a variation pattern of a special symbol in the probability variation gaming state. FIG. 20(a) is a table used when the result of the special symbol determination is a big hit, and is a probability variation time big hit fluctuation pattern table used to select a big hit fluctuation pattern. FIG. 20B is a probability variation time reach variation pattern table used when it is determined that a variation time longer than a predetermined time is selected using a reach random number when the result of the special symbol determination is a loss. FIG. 20C is a table used when the result of the special symbol determination is a loss and it is determined not to select a variation time of a predetermined time or more using the reach random number.

As shown in FIG. 20A, when the probability variation game state is determined as a big hit in the first special symbol determination, and the big hit symbol Z1 is selected, the variation pattern OP5-1 (variation time 65 seconds) Is selected. When the big hit symbol Z2 is selected, the variation pattern OP5-2 (variation time 60 seconds) is selected. Further, when it is determined as a big hit in the first special symbol determination in the probability variation gaming state, and when the big hit symbol Z3 is selected, the variation pattern OP6 (variation time 53 seconds) is selected. Further, when it is determined as a big hit in the second special symbol determination in the probability variation gaming state, and when the big hit symbol Z4 is selected, the variation pattern OP5-1 (variation time 65 seconds) is selected. When the big hit symbol Z5 is selected, the variation pattern OP5-2 (variation time 60 seconds) is selected. Further, when it is determined as a big hit in the second special symbol determination in the probability variation gaming state, and when the big hit symbol Z6 is selected, the variation pattern OP6 (variation time 53 seconds) is selected.

When the variation pattern OP5-1 or OP5-2 is selected, the effect control unit 130 performs the winning effect. In addition, when the variation pattern OP5-1 is selected, it is informed that the 10R probability variation jackpot that is more advantageous to the player in the winning effect is notified, and the winning effect executed when the variation pattern OP5-2 is selected is selected. A flashy production is performed. Moreover, when the variation pattern OP6 is selected, the defeat effect is performed by the effect control unit 130.

Further, as shown in FIG. 20B, the reach variation pattern table used in the probability variation gaming state includes the reach variation pattern RP5 (variation time of 50 seconds). When the reach variation pattern RP5 is selected, the draw control is performed by the effect control unit 130.

Further, as shown in FIG. 20C, in the loss variation pattern table used in the probability variation game state, the loss variation pattern HP4-1 (variation time 15 which is selected based on the winning of the first starting opening 11). Seconds), and the loss variation patterns HP4-2 (variation time of 2 seconds) and HP4-3 (variation time of 15 seconds) that are selected based on winning in the second starting opening 12. The loss variation pattern HP4-2 is selected when the number U2 of reservations is 1 or more, and the variation variation pattern HP4-3 is selected when the number U2 of reservations is "0".

In the time saving game state, the same variation pattern table as the probability variation gaming state may be used as the variation pattern table for selecting the variation pattern of the special symbol, or a variation pattern table different from the probability variation gaming state is used. You may be asked.

(Direction during warning notification)
Next, an effect during the hit notification in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described. Here, in the present embodiment, a light emission effect for the decorative pattern is performed on the liquid crystal screen 5. The light emission effect in the present embodiment is an effect in which an effect image (an image representing light emission, lightning, sparks, etc.) in which a decorative pattern appears to be shining is displayed on the liquid crystal screen 5. The effect image representing light may be an effect display in which light is emitted or an effect display in which light is absorbed, as long as it is an image used for enhancing the visual effect. The light emission effect performed during the hit notification is called a hit light emission effect. The hit light emission effect will be described below. First, with reference to FIG. 21 to FIG. 24, the hit notification performed after the SPSP reach effect in the normal game state will be described.

FIG. 21 is a diagram showing a flow of a variable effect including an SPSP reach effect. FIG. 22 is a diagram showing details of the hit notification performed as a result of the SPSP reach effect. FIG. 23 is a diagram showing an example of an image displayed on the screen when the variable effect including the SPSP reach effect shown in FIG. 22 is performed. FIG. 24 is a diagram showing an example of an image displayed on the screen when the hit notification is performed, which is an effect subsequent to FIG. 23. As described above, the variation effect including the SPSP reach effect is executed when the variation pattern OP4 or RP4 is selected.

FIG. 23(A) shows an example of an image displayed on the liquid crystal screen 5 at the timing when the variable display of the special symbol is finished. In FIG. 23A, the three decorative symbols 55 are stopped and displayed on the liquid crystal screen 5. Further, in FIG. 23A, a normal background image is displayed. As shown in the drawing, each of the three decorative patterns 55 has a size of “medium” and is a decorative pattern 55 in a character mode. Further, in the lower area of the liquid crystal screen 5, a plurality of holding icons 51 indicating holding of the right of the first special symbol determination is displayed. Up to four hold icons 51 are displayed. The hold icon 51 is basically displayed in white, and when the reliability is relatively high, it is a color other than white indicating a high or low reliability (for example, blue, green, red, zebra, and rainbow). It is displayed (it may be displayed from the beginning or may be changed in the middle). The color of the hold icon 51 is determined by a random number lottery based on the result of the preliminary determination by the effect control unit 130.

In the lower center area of the screen, a changing icon 53 showing the current change of the first special symbol is displayed. In this embodiment, the earliest hold icon 51 is displayed as the changing icon 53. Therefore, the color of the changing icon 53 is basically the same as that of the hold icon 51. The changing icon 53 may change to a color (for example, blue, green, red, zebra, and iridescent) that indicates the reliability of the hold icon 51 or higher. The color of the changing icon 53 is determined by a random number lottery based on the result of the special symbol determination by the effect control unit 130.

In addition, a small symbol 56 is displayed at the lower left of the screen. The small symbol 56 includes three numerical symbols, fluctuates according to the fluctuation of the special symbol, and stops according to the stop of the special symbol. The small pattern 56 is displayed while the decorative pattern 55 is hidden during the change of the special pattern (for example, while the cut-in image is displayed on the entire screen, when the SPSP reach is developed or when the predetermined high reliability is achieved). It is displayed even when the screen is switched when the effect is started). In the present embodiment, no color indicating high or low reliability is added to the small pattern 56.

Further, a fourth symbol 57 corresponding to the first special symbol is displayed on the right end of the screen. The fourth symbol 57 is a symbol for effect that fluctuates and stops according to the fluctuation and stop of the first special symbol, and is constantly variably displayed on the screen during the fluctuation of the first special symbol. Further, the fourth symbol 59 corresponding to the second special symbol is also displayed. The fourth symbol 59 is a symbol for effect that fluctuates and stops according to the fluctuation and stop of the second special symbol, and is constantly displayed on the screen while changing the second special symbol. In the present embodiment, the fourth symbols 57 and 59 notify the result of the special symbol determination by the color during stop. The variation of the fourth symbols 57, 59 is, for example, an image of a color (for example, red, blue, yellow) for notifying the result of the special symbol determination, in a repeating order for a fixed time (for example, 0.2 seconds). It is realized by displaying each. In this embodiment, the reliability is not suggested by the colors of the changing fourth symbols 57 and 59. Further, no color indicating high or low reliability is added to the fourth symbols 57 and 59. The fourth symbols 57 and 59 may be displayed using other display means (for example, LED) provided around the liquid crystal screen 5, for example.

Further, on the lower right of the screen, a holding number 52 indicating the number of holdings of the first special symbol determination and the second special symbol determination is displayed. The reserved numbers 52 include a number on the left side indicating the number of reservations for the first special symbol determination and a number on the right side for indicating the number of reservations for the second special symbol determination. The reserved number 52 is always displayed on the screen while the special symbol is changing. In the present embodiment, the reserved figure 52 does not indicate the degree of reliability, and the reserved figure 52 is not added with a color that indicates the degree of reliability.

The hold icon 51, the changing icon 53, the small symbol 56, the reserved number 52, and the fourth symbols 57 and 59 are displayed in different places. Since these images are always displayed on the front side of the other images, they are not obscured by the other images. Specifically, for example, even when an effect image (effect images 61 and 62 described later) related to the winning light emission effect is displayed, the effect is applied to at least the small symbol 56, the reserved numeral 52, and the fourth symbols 57 and 59. The image is not applied, and the small symbol 56, the reserved numeral 52, and the fourth symbols 57 and 59 are neither invisible nor visible. The same applies when the hold icon 51 and the changing icon 53 are displayed during the winning light emission effect. In addition, even when the effect image related to the reach light emission effect, the non-reach light emission effect, and the opportunity light emission effect, which will be described later, are displayed, the hold icon 51, the changing icon 53, the small symbol 56, the hold number 52, and the fourth symbol. The effect image is not applied to 57 and 59, and the small symbol 56, the reserved numeral 52, and the fourth symbols 57 and 59 are not invisible and the visibility thereof is not reduced.

In the present embodiment, the sizes of the decorative symbol 55, the changing icon 53, the holding icon 51, the small symbol 56, the holding numeral 52, and the fourth symbols 57 and 59 are small in this order. The changing icon 53 and the hold icon 51 may have the same size. The small symbol 56 may be larger than the hold icon 51 (or the changing icon 53) or may be the same size as the hold icon 51 (or the changing icon 53). Further, the reserved numbers 52 and the fourth symbols 57, 59 may have the same size, or the reserved numbers 52 may be smaller than the fourth symbols 57, 59.

When the first special symbol determination is performed in the game control unit 100 and the variation pattern OP4 or RP4 is selected as the variation pattern of the special symbol, the variation display of the first special symbol is started on the first special symbol display 41. At the same time, a variation start command including the variation pattern OP4 or RP4 is transmitted from the game control unit 100 to the effect control unit 130. In response to receiving the variation start command, the effect control unit 130 causes the three decorative symbols 55 to start varying on the liquid crystal screen 5 (t0 in FIG. 21, FIG. 23(B)). Further, on the liquid crystal screen 5, the plurality of hold icons 51 are moved to the right side, respectively, and the rightmost hold icon 51 is displayed as the changing icon 53. Further, the number of holdings indicated by the holding number 52 decreases in response to the reception of the fluctuation start command.

The pre-reach effect is performed during the period from the start of variation of the decorative pattern 55 until the reach is established (between t0 to t1 in FIG. 21, and (B) to (C) in FIG. 23). In the pre-reach effect, the three decorative patterns 55 (the size is "medium" and the decorative pattern 55 in the character presence mode) that are stopped and displayed start changing in response to the reception of the fluctuation start command. The situation is displayed. After the three decorative symbols 55 start changing, the three decorative symbols 55 change at a high speed in the same manner as when the variation starts (that is, the size is “medium” and the character exists). Further, in the pre-reach effect, a notice effect (display of a notice image or an operation of moving the movable accessory 7) that suggests the possibility of a big hit is performed, or a pseudo-variable effect of artificially changing the decorative pattern 55 is performed. I will be broken.

When a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of variation of the three decorative patterns 55, the decorative patterns 55 of the same type are temporarily stopped on the left and right, and reach is established (t1 in FIG. 21, FIG. 23(C)). For example, before the reach is established, the left decorative pattern 55 of the three decorative patterns 55 is slowly moved from the upper part of the screen and temporarily stopped in the left area of the screen, and then the right decorative pattern 55 is Move slowly and stop temporarily in the area on the right side of the screen. Then, a sound indicating that the reach is established is output, and an image indicating that the reach is established is displayed. At this time, the small symbol 56 is not displayed in the reach mode, but is displayed in a state in which the three small symbols are changed. When the decorative design 55 is displayed in the reach mode, the small design 56 may be displayed in the reach mode.

It should be noted that the outline of the reach effect will be described below, but details of the reach effect after the reach is established will be described later.

When the reach is established, the N reach effect is performed (t1 to t2 in FIG. 21, FIG. 23D). During the N reach production, the state that the size is “middle” to the left and right, and the decorative pattern 55 in the character presence mode is temporarily stopped, and the decorative pattern 55 in the middle area moves from the top to the bottom of the screen is displayed. (FIGS. 23D and 23E). As a result, the player is expected to stop the decorative pattern 55 of the same kind as the left and right in the middle area. Further, during the N reach effect, a normal background image is displayed.

After the N reach production, the SP development production that suggests the development to the SP reach production is performed (t2 in FIG. 21, FIG. 23(F)). For example, in the final stage of the N reach effect, an effect as if the decoration pattern 55 in the middle area slowly moves and stops in the middle area is performed, and the speed of the decoration pattern 55 in the middle area increases (see FIG. 21). t2), the SP development effect is performed by changing the decoration pattern 55 in the middle area again at high speed. When the SP development effect is performed, as shown in FIG. 23(F), for example, the left and right decorative designs 55 move to the left and right of the upper part of the screen while shrinking. At this time, the character images added to the left and right decorative patterns 55 are separated, and the character-free mode is changed. That is, in the SP development effect, the left and right decorative patterns 55 change from the size “medium” and the character present mode to the size “small” and no character mode.

After the SP development effect is performed, the SP reach effect is started (t3 in FIG. 21, FIG. 23(G)). During the SP reach effect, the left and right decorative patterns 55 are of a size “small”, and are temporarily stopped on the left and right of the screen in a mode without a character, and a moving image effect corresponding to the SP reach effect is performed in the center of the screen. .. Further, during the SP reach effect, the SP background image for the SP reach effect is displayed. During the SP reach effect, an effect that makes the player expect a big hit is performed. For example, in the SP reach effect, an effect in which a 2D anime character makes a predetermined motion is displayed. Further, as shown in FIG. 23(G), after the SP reach effect is started, the hold icon 51 and the changing icon 53 are hidden. During the SP reach effect, the hold icon 51 and the changing icon 53 may be continuously displayed, or only the hold icon 51 may be hidden and the changing icon 53 may be continuously displayed.

When the SP reach production ends, the SPSP development production that suggests the development to the SPSP reach production is performed (t4 in FIG. 21, FIG. 23(H)). For example, in the SPSP development performance, a title regarding the SPSP reach performance to be executed may be displayed. The display mode of this title may suggest the reliability of the jackpot.

After the SPSP development effect is performed, the SPSP reach effect is started (t5 in FIG. 21, FIG. 23(I)). For example, during the SPSP reach production, the left and right decorative patterns 55 are displayed in a size “small” and are temporarily stopped on the left and right sides of the screen in a mode without a character, and a jackpot is given to the player at the center of the screen. The expected 3D video is displayed. Further, during the SPSP reach effect, the SPSP background image for the SPSP reach effect is displayed. The hold icon 51 and the changing icon 53 may be continuously displayed during the SP reach effect, or the hold icon 51 and the changing icon 53 may be hidden according to the start of the SPSP reach effect. Alternatively, only the hold icon 51 may be hidden.

When the SPSP reach effect is performed for a predetermined time, as a result of the SPSP reach effect, a winning notification is given to notify whether or not it is a big hit (t7 in FIG. 21). Specifically, the final production of the SPSP reach production, and immediately before the winning notification, the final production is performed (t6 in FIGS. 21 and 22, FIG. 24(J)). For example, in the decided effect, as shown in FIG. 24(J), an operation promotion effect that urges the player to operate the effect button 26 is performed. The operation promotion effect includes an operation promotion image 65 and an effective period image 651 showing an effective period of the operation on the effect button 26. Then, when it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit in response to the operation on the effect button 26 or when the effective time of the operation has elapsed (that is, the variation pattern OP4 is selected). In this case), as a winning notification, a winning notification for notifying a big hit is performed (t7 in FIG. 22). In addition, in the decided effect, the operation promotion effect may not be performed. When the operation promotion effect is performed in the decided effect, the reliability of a big hit may be higher than when the operation promotion effect is not performed. If the operation promotion effect is not performed, the winning notification is given when a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the decided effect, regardless of whether the effect button 26 is operated.

In the hit notification, the big hit is notified by a symbol-matching effect in which three decorative symbols 55 are matched (t7 to t8 in FIG. 22, FIG. 24(K)). In the symbol matching effect, the decorative symbols 55 of the same type as the left and right are temporarily stopped in the middle area of the screen. The three decorative symbols 55 when the symbol matching effect is performed are in a character-less mode. As shown in FIG. 24(K), when the decorative design 55 is temporarily stopped in the middle area, a decorative design 55 larger than the left and right decorative designs 55 is displayed and the effect of emphasizing the decorative design 55 in the middle area is displayed. The image 60 is displayed. For example, the effect image 60 is an image displayed around the decoration pattern 55 in the middle area, and is an image in which the decoration pattern 55 in the middle area emits light, and is an image brighter than the decoration pattern 55 in the middle area. is there. Further, as shown in FIG. 24(K), even when the three decorative symbols 55 of the same kind are arranged, the three small symbols 56 are changing at high speed. The small symbol 56 may be temporarily stopped in a big-hit mode (“333”) at the timing of the hit notification shown in FIG. 24(K). In this case, the three small symbols 56, after the hit notification timing shown in FIG. 24(K), are in a big-hit mode and swing in the same manner as the decorative symbol 55, and when the decorative symbol 55 is permanently stopped. This may be stopped (at the time of stop display of the special symbol).

At time t7 in FIG. 22, the jackpot may be notified by an accessory operation effect in which the movable accessory 7 operates instead of the symbol matching effect. In the accessory effect production, for example, the movable accessory 7 appears on the front surface of the liquid crystal screen 5, and the screen is almost entirely covered by the movable accessory 7. As a result, the player is notified of the big hit. When the jackpot is notified by the accessory operation effect instead of the symbol matching effect, the left and right decorative symbols 55 may be hidden during the SPSP reach effect (FIGS. 23(H) to 24(J)). .. In this case, even if the small design 56 is displayed, the left and right decorative designs 55 are not displayed, and even if the moving image production for SPSP reach production (for example, the production in which the ally character attacks the enemy character) is displayed. Good. Moreover, when the left and right decorative designs 55 are hidden during the SPSP reach effect, the small designs 56 may also be hidden. Then, in the final stage finalization effect of the SPSP reach effect (FIG. 24(J)), for example, an effect of fueling whether the attack of the ally character succeeds is performed, and at time t7 of FIG. Be seen.

Further, the symbol alignment effect may be performed immediately after the accessory action operation effect is performed, or the accessory action effect effect may be performed immediately after the symbol alignment effect is performed.

After the symbol-matching effect (or/and the accessory operation effect), the first light-emitting effect that is a kind of the winning light-emitting effect is performed (t8 in FIG. 22, FIG. 24(L)). The first light emission effect is an effect that is performed on the decorative pattern 55 when the decorative pattern 55 is displayed in the big hit mode, and is an effect that emphasizes the decorative pattern 55. Here, "when the decorative pattern 55 is displayed in the jackpot mode" means that the decorative pattern 55 is displayed in the jackpot mode and the timing when the decorative pattern 55 is displayed in the jackpot mode. And the case where it is immediately before the decorative pattern 55 is displayed in the jackpot mode. That is, the first light emission effect may be started in a state where the decoration pattern 55 of the jackpot mode shown in FIG. 24(L) is displayed, or the decoration pattern 55 of the jackpot mode shown in FIG. The first light emission effect may be started at the timing of display. In addition, the first light-emission effect may be started immediately before the decorative design 55 of the jackpot mode shown in FIG. 24(L) is displayed. For example, in the first light emission effect, an effect image 61 (for example, a white image) brighter than the decorative design 55 itself is provided around each decorative design 55 so that the surroundings of the three decorative designs 55 emit a common luminescent color. It may be an effect to be displayed. The effect image 61 is added to each of the three decorative patterns 55. The effect image 61 in the first light emission effect may be different from the effect image 60 in the symbol matching effect, or may be the same image. Further, the first light emission effect may be an effect in which the decorative pattern 55 itself emits light. In addition, you may display the effect image 61 of the rainbow color which suggests a big hit by 1st light emission production.

In addition, in the first light emission effect, the three decorative symbols 55 are displayed in a size of “large” and without characters. Specifically, it is larger than the left and right decorative designs 55 during SPSP reach production, the three decorative designs 55 during pre-reach production, and the intermediate design pattern 55 shown in FIG. Thus, the three decorative designs 55 are enlarged and displayed, and the decorative design 55 in the middle area is displayed larger than the left and right decorative designs 55. In the first light emission effect, a state in which the three decorative patterns 55 are enlarged by moving from the back to the front of the screen is displayed. After the three decorative patterns 55 are enlarged to the maximum, the three decorative patterns 55 are reduced so as to move from the front side to the rear side of the screen. In addition, a first hit light emission effect sound is output from the speaker 24 along with the first light emission effect. In the present embodiment, the display time of the effect image 60 related to the first light emission effect and the output time of the first hit light emission effect sound are the same. Note that the relationship between these times may be any relationship, and for example, the output time may be shorter or longer than the display time. Further, during the first light emission effect, the three small symbols 56 continue to change at high speed. During execution of the first light emission effect, the three small symbols 56 may be temporarily stopped in a jackpot mode. For example, the three small symbols 56 may be temporarily stopped in a jackpot manner at the timing when the first light emission effect is started. In addition, before the first light emission effect is started (for example, at time t7), the three small symbols 56 may be temporarily stopped in a jackpot manner, and the temporary stop state may be continued during the first light emission effect. Further, during the first light emission effect, the small symbol 56 may be hidden.

The first light emission effect is performed by reproducing a moving image stored in advance. Specifically, a moving image of a decorative pattern for the first light emission effect (a moving image in which the decorative pattern 55 emits light) is stored in advance in the image acoustic control unit 140, and the moving image is reproduced to thereby generate the first image. A luminous effect is performed. The decorative pattern 55 and the effect image 61 are stored in advance in the image/acoustic control unit 140 of the gaming machine 1, and the image/acoustic control unit 140 displays the effect image 61 around the decorative pattern 55, whereby the first light emission is performed. Direction may be performed.

Then, when the first light emission effect ends (when the effect image 61 disappears), as shown in FIG. 24(M), the three decorative symbols 55 are temporarily stopped in the mode of the size “medium” (FIG. 22 t9). In this state, the three decorative patterns 55 do not completely stop and swing on the screen. At this time, the three decorative patterns 55 may be in a character-free mode or a character-based mode. For example, the three decorative patterns 55 in the characterless mode shown in FIG. 24(L) may be reduced, and the three decorative patterns 55 in the characterless mode may swing in FIG. 24(M). Alternatively, after the three decorative patterns 55 in the character-less mode are displayed in FIG. 24(L), the background is switched to the background image for jackpot (or a normal background image), and in FIG. 24(M), there is a character. The three decorative patterns 55 of the aspect may swing. In the case of switching to the normal background image in FIG. 24(M), the hold icon 51 and the changing icon 53 may be displayed again.

When the predetermined swing period elapses, next, a second light emission effect, which is a type of winning light emission effect, is performed (t10 in FIG. 22, FIG. 24(N)). The second light emission effect is an effect that is performed on the decorative pattern 55 in a state where the decorative pattern 55 is temporarily stopped in the form of a big hit, and is an effect that emphasizes the decorative pattern 55. The second light emission effect is an effect in which each of the three decorative patterns 55 emits a common light emission color, and is an effect different from the first light emission effect. For example, in the second light emission effect, an effect image 62 (for example, a white image) brighter than the decorative design 55 itself may be added to each of the three decorative designs 55. Moreover, in the second light emission effect, a part of the decorative pattern 55 emits light, and the light emission portion may move from top to bottom. The decorative pattern 55 and the effect image 62 are stored in advance in the image/sound control unit 140 of the gaming machine 1, and the image/sound control unit 140 draws the effect image 62 in a layer on the front side or the back side of the decorative pattern 55. The second light emission effect may be performed. Alternatively, a moving image of a decorative design for the second light emission effect (a moving image in which the decorative design 55 emits light) is stored in advance in the image acoustic control unit 140, and the three moving designs 55 are reproduced by reproducing the moving image. The second light emission effect in which each of the above lights is emitted may be performed. In addition, you may display the iridescent effect image 62 which suggests a big hit by the 2nd light emission production.

Further, in the second light emission effect, the three decorative symbols 55 may be displayed in the size “medium” and with the character, or in the size “medium” and without the character. May be. Even during the second light emission effect, the three decorative patterns 55 are still swinging. Along with the second light emission effect, a second hit light emission effect sound different from the first hit light emission effect sound is output from the speaker 24. The second hit light emission effect sound may be the same effect sound as the first hit light emission effect sound. In the present embodiment, the display time of the effect image 62 related to the second light emission effect and the output time of the second hit light emission effect sound are the same. Note that the relationship between these times may be any relationship, and for example, the output time may be shorter or longer than the display time. Further, during execution of the second light emission effect, the three small symbols 56 continue to change at high speed. In addition, during execution of the second light emission effect, the three small symbols 56 may be temporarily stopped in the manner of a big hit as in the decorative symbol 55. For example, the three small symbols 56 may be temporarily stopped in a jackpot manner at the timing when the second light emission effect is started. In addition, before the second light emission effect is started (for example, at time t7), the three small symbols 56 may be temporarily stopped in a jackpot manner, and the temporary stop state may be continued during the second light emission effect. Further, during the second light emission effect, the small symbol 56 may be hidden.

When the second light emission effect is finished, as shown in FIG. 24(O), the three decorative symbols 55 swing in the mode of the size “medium” (t11 in FIG. 22). At this time, the modes of the three decorative patterns 55 are the same as those in the second light emission effect. Then, when the predetermined swing period has elapsed, the special symbols are stopped by the game control unit 100 and a variation stop command is transmitted to the effect control unit 130, and the three decorative symbols 55 are permanently stopped, and the three small symbols. 56 is also stopped (t12 in FIG. 22, FIG. 24(P)). Here, the main stop means that the three decorative patterns 55 are completely stopped. Incidentally, in response to this fluctuation stop command, the fourth symbol 57 also stops changing, and is stopped and displayed in a mode showing a big hit.

When a predetermined fixed stop period (for example, 0.5 seconds) elapses after the special symbol is stopped and displayed, an opening command indicating the start of the big hit game is transmitted from the game control unit 100 to the effect control unit 130, In response to the reception of the opening command, the effect control unit 130 starts the opening effect (t13 in FIG. 22, FIG. 24(Q)). Then, when the opening period elapses, the jackpot game of opening the special winning opening 13 is started. In response to the start of the jackpot game, the game control unit 100 sends a round start command for the first round to the effect control unit 130, and the effect control unit 130 starts the jackpot effect in response to the round start command. ..

In this way, during the hit notification, a hit light emission effect (first light emission effect and second light emission effect) for the decorative pattern 55 is performed.

It should be noted that when the hit notification is performed, in addition to the effect produced by the image on the liquid crystal screen 5, a light emission effect (lamp light emission effect) for causing the panel lamp 25 and/or the frame lamp 37 to emit light in a mode suggesting a big hit is performed. Be seen. The lamp emission effect using the panel lamp 25 and/or the frame lamp 37 is performed for a predetermined period from the hit notification at time t7. For example, the panel lamp 25 and the frame lamp 37 are provided with a plurality of LEDs capable of emitting light in a plurality of emission colors, and in the lamp emission production, the panel lamp 25 and/or the frame lamp 37 have a predetermined light emission pattern ( For example, the panel lamp 25 and/or the frame lamp 37 emit light in a light emission pattern such that they emit rainbow colors. The details of the lamp light emission effect during the hit notification will be described later.

In addition, when the result of the special symbol determination is a loss, after the FIG. 24(J), the three decorative symbols 55 are not aligned and the loss is notified. FIG. 25 is a diagram illustrating details of the loss notification performed as a result of the SPSP reach effect. FIG. 26 is a diagram showing an example of an image displayed on the screen when the notification of loss is performed, which is an effect subsequent to FIG. 23.

As shown in FIG. 25, at time t7, the notification of loss is performed by the effect of non-uniform design in which the three decorative symbols 55 are not aligned. In the design non-uniform production, the decorative pattern 55 different from the left and right decorative patterns 55 is temporarily stopped in the middle area, and the reach is lost (FIG. 26 (K-2)). At this time, the effect image 60 attached to the decorative pattern 55 in the middle area shown in FIG. 24(K) is not displayed. In addition, when reach reach eyes are displayed, an effect image different from or the same as the effect image 60 may be displayed on the decorative pattern 55 in the middle area. Further, even when the decorative design 55 temporarily stops in the middle area, the three small designs 56 continue to change at high speed. The small symbol 56 may be temporarily stopped in the manner of loss (“343”) at the timing of notification of loss shown in FIG. 26(K-2). After the effect of non-uniform design is performed, the background is switched to a normal background image, and three decorative patterns 55 (reach-miss eyes) indicating reach loss are temporarily stopped in the center of the screen and swing (t8-2 in FIG. 25, FIG. 26 (L-2)). At the timing when the screen is switched to the normal background, the three decorative patterns 55 have the size “medium” and the character-present mode is restored. At this time, the hold icon 51 and the changing icon 53 are also displayed again. Further, also at the time point 8-2, the three small symbols 56 continue to change at high speed.

Then, when a predetermined swing period elapses, a variation stop command is transmitted from the game control unit 100 to the effect control unit 130, and in response to receiving the variation stop command, the three decorative symbols 55 are permanently stopped. The three small symbols 56 are also stopped (t8-3 in FIG. 25, FIG. 26 (M-2)). Furthermore, when the right of special symbol determination is reserved, the special symbol determination relating to the right is performed, and the variation start command is transmitted from the game control unit 100 to the effect control unit 130. In response to the fluctuation start command, the three decorative symbols 55 that have been stopped are started to change (FIG. 26 (N-2)).

The swing period in the loss notification (the period from time t8-2 to t8-3) may be shorter or longer than the swing period after the first light emission effect in the hit notification (the period from time t9 to t10). May be.

In addition, during the swing period in the notification of loss, a resurrection-inspiring effect may be performed to make the player expect a resurrection effect. The revival effect is an effect that the jackpot is notified after the decorative design 55 is temporarily stopped (temporary loss) in a losing manner after the decided effect. When it is determined to be a big hit in the special symbol determination, a revival effect may be performed after the revival fueling effect, and the jackpot may be notified. For example, an accessory operation effect may be performed as a revival effect. In addition, when it is determined that the special symbol is lost, after the revival fueling effect, the revival effect is not performed and the variable effect is ended. When a resurrection fan effect or a resurrection effect is performed, the swing period (the period from time t8-2 to t8-3) is the swing period after the first light emission effect in the hit notification (from time t9 to t10). Period).

(Re-lottery production during winning notification)
The lottery effect may be performed during the hit notification shown in FIG. 22 and FIG. 24(K) and thereafter. The re-lottery effect is an effect that indicates that the result of the special symbol determination is a big hit, and is an effect that makes the player expect whether or not the types of the three decorative symbols 55 are changed. In the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the type of jackpot is suggested by the type of the decorative design 55 when the three decorative designs 55 are aligned. For example, the "7" symbol is a symbol showing a 10R certainty variation jackpot which is the most advantageous jackpot for the player, the odd symbol is a symbol showing a certain variation jackpot (10R certainty variation jackpot or 4R certain variation jackpot), and an even symbol is 4R It is a pattern that suggests the possibility of a normal jackpot. Therefore, the re-lottery effect is an effect that makes the player expect an advantageous jackpot or not.

FIG. 27 is a diagram showing a flow of effects when the re-lottery effect is performed during the winning notification. FIG. 28 is a diagram showing an example of an image displayed on the screen when the re-lottery effect is performed during the winning notification.

As shown in FIG. 27, after the final stage decision effect of the SPSP reach effect, the jackpot is informed by the symbol alignment effect and/or the accessory operation effect, and then the first light emission effect is performed at time T8-1. (FIG. 28(A)). After the first light emission effect is performed, the three decorative symbols 55 are aligned and swing in the center of the screen (FIG. 28(B)), and at time T8-2, the re-lottery effect is performed (FIG. 28(C). )).

In the re-lottery effect, for example, a plurality of symbol columns (for example, a symbol column of “333” or a symbol column of “444”) in which three decorative symbols 55 of the same type are arranged in the horizontal direction are displayed, and the plurality of symbol columns are displayed on the screen. The state of moving from above to below is displayed. Even during this re-lottery effect, the three small symbols 56 are changing at high speed. Then, after the re-lottery effect is performed for a predetermined time, at time T8-3, the three decorative symbols 55 are provisionally stopped as a result of the re-lottery effect, and the first light emission effect is performed (FIG. 28 ( D)). The second first light emission effect (FIG. 28(D)) performed at time T8-3 and the first first light emission effect (FIG. 28(A)) performed at time T8-1 are the same effect. Or different productions may be used. Also, during the second first light emission effect, the three small symbols 56 are changing at high speed. It should be noted that during the second light emission effect of the second time, the three small symbols 56 may be temporarily stopped in the same jackpot manner as the three decorative symbols 55. For example, the three small symbols 56 may be temporarily stopped at or after the second first light emission effect is started. Further, the three small symbols 56 may be temporarily stopped before the second light emission effect for the second time is started, and the temporary stop state may be maintained during the second light emission effect for the second time.

For example, when the type of the decorative pattern 55 displayed in the second first light emission effect is different from the type of the decorative pattern 55 displayed in the first first light emission effect, the second first light emission effect and 1 An effect mode different from the first light emission effect of the first time may be used. An even number pattern suggesting a 4R normal jackpot is displayed during the first 1st light emission effect, and an odd number symbol (an odd number symbol other than the “7” symbol) or 4R probability variation jackpot that indicates a 4R probability variation jackpot during the 2nd 1st emission performance. When the "7" symbol that suggests is displayed, the first light emission effect of the first time and the first light emission effect of the second time may be different effect modes. Specifically, in this case, the second light emission effect for the second time may be more flashy than the first light emission effect for the first time. In the second light emission effect of the second time, a more flashy effect is displayed when the "7" symbol indicating the 10R probability variation jackpot is displayed, than when the odd number pattern indicating the 4R probability variation jackpot is displayed. May be. That is, when the re-lottery effect is used to upgrade (notify that the jackpot is more advantageous to the player), the first light emission effect before the upgrade performed at time T8-1 and the time at T8-3. A different effect may be performed with respect to the first light emission effect after the upgrade. For example, in the first light emission effect before the upgrade, the white effect image 61 is displayed around the decorative pattern 55, while in the first light emission effect after the upgrade, the rainbow effect image 61 is displayed around the decorative pattern 55. It may be displayed. Further, the decorative pattern 55 may be displayed larger in the first light emission effect after the upgrade than in the first light emission effect before the upgrade.

On the other hand, in the first light emission effect of the first time, an even number pattern suggesting a 4R normal jackpot is displayed, and when the same even number symbol is displayed in the second light emission effect of the second time, the first light emission effect of the first time and 2 The first first light emission effect may be the same effect mode. Alternatively, in this case, the second light emission effect of the second time may be a more light effect than the first light emission effect of the first time. For example, a relatively large decorative pattern 55 is displayed in the first light emitting effect of the first time, and an effect image 61 of a relatively bright color is displayed, and a relatively small decorative pattern 55 is displayed in the first light emitting effect of the second time. In addition, the effect image 61 of a relatively dark color may be displayed.

After the second light emission effect for the second time is performed, the three decorative symbols 55 are aligned and swing in the center of the screen (t9 in FIG. 27, FIG. 28E). Then, the second light emission effect is performed (FIG. 28(F)). After (F) in FIG. 28, the same effect as that after (N) in FIG. 24 is performed.

In this way, the first light emission effect may be performed twice during the hit notification. Even in this case, the second light emission effect is performed only once.

(Winning notification by stopping special symbols)
In the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, special symbols are prepared in addition to the decorative symbols 55 represented by numbers such as “1” to “9” symbols. In the following, the hit notification by stopping the special symbol will be described.

FIG. 29 is a diagram showing a flow of a variable effect including a special effect. FIG. 30 is a diagram illustrating details of the hit notification performed as a result of the special effect. FIG. 31 is a diagram showing an example of an image displayed on the screen when the variable effect including the special effect shown in FIG. 29 is performed. FIG. 32 is a diagram showing another example of an image displayed on the screen when a variable effect including a special effect is performed. As described above, the variation effect including the special effect is executed when the variation pattern OP3 or RP3 is selected.

As shown in FIG. 29, similarly to FIG. 21, after the start of the variation of the special symbol, each effect is performed in the order of pre-reach effect and N reach effect (t0 to t2 in FIG. 29), and SP reach effect at time t3. Is started (FIG. 31(A)). FIG. 31A is an image similar to FIG.

After the SP reach effect is started, instead of performing the SPSP development effect, the temporary design is stopped by the decorative pattern 55 different from the left and right decorative patterns 55 in the center of the screen (T4 in FIG. 29). -1, FIG. 31(B)). After that, a special development-inspiring effect that makes the player expect whether or not to develop into a special effect is performed (T5-1 in FIG. 29). After the special development fueling effect, the special effect is started (T5-2 of FIG. 29, FIG. 31C). In the special effect, the special symbol is variably displayed and the player is expected to stop the special symbol (FIG. 31(D)). Alternatively, in the special effect, an effect that causes the player to expect the special symbol to change from an unclear state to a clear state may be performed. Here, the special symbol is an image that does not include a numerical symbol, and is a symbol composed of images of characters, characters, etc. For example, it is a symbol that suggests the possibility of both a 4R certainty jackpot and a 4R normal jackpot. When a predetermined time has passed since the special effect was started, the winning notification is given (T7-1 in FIG. 29). Even when the temporary loss is notified at T4-1, the three small symbols 56 continue to change at high speed. In addition, the three small symbols 56 continue to change at high speed even during the execution of the special effect.

When the result of the special symbol determination is a big hit, the winning notification is performed as the winning notification (T7-1 of FIG. 30). Specifically, at time T7-1, the special symbol temporarily stops (FIG. 31(E)). Alternatively, as the winning notification, the special symbol may be changed to a clear state. As a result, the player is notified of the big hit. Even when this special symbol temporarily stops, the three small symbols 56 continue to change at high speed. When the special symbol stops, the three small symbols 56 may also be temporarily stopped. In this case, a small symbol (special small symbol) corresponding to the special symbol displayed in the center of the screen may be temporarily stopped in the lower left area of the screen.

When the special symbol is displayed, the first light emission effect is performed (T7-2 in FIG. 30, FIG. 31(F)). For example, the first light emission effect is performed after the special symbol is temporarily stopped, or at the timing when the special symbol is temporarily stopped. The first light emission effect performed here is an effect performed on the special symbol and is an effect that emphasizes the special symbol. For example, the first light emission effect for the special symbol, the effect image 63 (for example, a white image) brighter than the special symbol itself is displayed around the special symbol so that the periphery of the special symbol emits a predetermined light emission color. May be The effect image 63 is an image different from the effect image 61 added to each of the three decorative patterns 55 of FIG. Further, during the first light emission effect for the special symbol, the special symbol is enlarged and displayed. The effect image 63 in the first light emission effect for the special symbol and the effect image 61 in the first light emission effect (FIG. 24(L)) when the symbols are aligned may be the same image. The three small symbols 56 continue to change at high speed even during the first light emission effect for the special symbol. Note that the three small symbols 56 may be temporarily stopped during the first light emission effect. For example, the three small symbols 56 may be temporarily stopped at or after the first light emission effect is started. Further, the three small symbols 56 may be temporarily stopped before the first light emission effect is started, and the temporary stop state may be maintained during the first light emission effect.

When the first light emission effect ends, the special symbol temporarily stops at the center of the screen and swings (T7-3 in FIG. 30, FIG. 31(G)). When the predetermined swing period elapses, the second light emission effect is next performed (T7-4 in FIG. 30, FIG. 31(H)). The second light emission effect is an effect that is performed on the special symbol, and is an effect that emphasizes the special symbol. For example, the second light emission effect for the special symbol is an effect in which the effect image 64 is added to the special symbol so that a part of the special symbol emits a predetermined light emission color. The effect image 64 may be the same image as the effect image 62 added to each of the three decorative patterns 55 of FIG. 24(N), or may be a different image. Even during the second light emission effect for the special symbol, the three small symbols 56 continue to change at high speed. Note that the three small symbols 56 may be temporarily stopped during the second light emission effect. For example, the three small symbols 56 may be temporarily stopped at or after the timing when the second light emission effect is started. Further, the three small symbols 56 may be temporarily stopped before the second light emission effect is started, and the temporary stop state may be maintained during the second light emission effect.

When the second light emission effect is finished, the special symbol swings in the center of the screen (T7-5 in FIG. 30, FIG. 31(I)), and then the special symbol is finally stopped according to the stop of the special symbol, and small. The design 56 is also stopped (T7-6 in FIG. 30).

In addition, when the big hit is notified by the special symbol, the second light emission effect may not be performed. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 32, after the first light emission effect is performed at time T7-2, the special symbol swings in the center of the screen (FIG. 32(G)), and then the second light emission. Without the production, the special symbol is stopped according to the stop of the special symbol, and the small symbol 56 is also stopped as a special small symbol corresponding to the special symbol (FIG. 32 (G-2)).

Although illustration is omitted, when the big hit is notified by the special symbol, the first light emission effect may not be performed. In this case, the first light emission effect may not be performed at time T7-2 and the second light emission effect may be performed at time T-4. Moreover, when the big hit is notified by the special symbol, both the first light emission effect and the second light emission effect may not be performed.

If the result of the special symbol determination is a loss, the special symbol does not stop in FIG. 31(E) (or the special symbol is not displayed in a clear state), and the first light emission effect and the second light emission. Without the effect, the decorative pattern indicating the loss is stopped.

(Sound notification in probability variation game state)
Next, the hit notification in the probability variation gaming state will be described. Hereinafter, with reference to FIGS. 33 to 37, the hit notification performed after the battle effect in the probability variation gaming state will be described. In the probability variation game state, if the special symbol determination is determined to be a big hit, the reach is established in the variation effect, and the battle effect in which the characters fight each other is performed. In the probability variation gaming state, if it is determined that the 10R probability variation jackpot or the 4R probability variation jackpot, the winning effect is performed as a result of the battle effect. On the other hand, in the probability variation game state, if it is determined that it is a 4R normal jackpot, a battle effect is performed, and as a result of the battle effect, a defeat effect is performed. Further, in the probability variation game state, even if it is determined that the special symbol is lost and the reach variation pattern RP5 is selected, the reach is established in the variation effect and the battle effect is performed. In this case, a draw effect is performed as a result of the battle effect. Hereinafter, in the probability variation gaming state, the case where it is determined that the 10R probability variation jackpot or the 4R probability variation jackpot will be described.

FIG. 33 is a diagram showing a flow of the variation effect when it is determined that the jackpot in the probability variation gaming state. FIG. 34 is a diagram showing an example of an image displayed on the screen when the variation effect shown in FIG. 33 is performed. FIG. 35: is a figure which shows an example of the effect following FIG. The variation effects shown in FIGS. 33 to 35 are executed when the variation pattern OP5-1 or OP5-2 is selected.

In FIG. 34(A), an example of an image at the timing when the variable display of the second special symbol is finished in the probability variation game state is shown. As shown in FIG. 34(A), in the probability variation gaming state, as the decorative symbol 55, a decorative symbol different from the normal gaming state is displayed. In the probability variation game state, the decorative pattern 55 has a size of "medium" and has no character. In the probability variation gaming state, a background image for probability variation is displayed as the background image. Further, in the probability variation game state, characters and images prompting the player to "right hit" are displayed on the screen. Further, the fourth symbol 59 corresponding to the second special symbol is displayed at the right end of the screen. The fourth symbol 57 corresponding to the first special symbol is also displayed.

Further, in the lower area of the screen, a plurality of holding icons 51 indicating the holding of the right of the second special symbol determination, and a changing icon 53 indicating the current change of the second special symbol are displayed. Further, on the lower right of the screen, a holding number 52 indicating the number of holdings of the first special symbol determination and the second special symbol determination is displayed. In addition, a small symbol 56 is displayed at the lower left of the screen. Since the small symbols 56 are displayed in the same manner as the normal gaming state, detailed description thereof will be omitted below. The small symbol 56 may be displayed in the normal gaming state and may not be displayed in the probability variation gaming state.

When the second special symbol determination is performed in the game control unit 100, the variable display of the second special symbol is started on the second special symbol display 42, and the variation start command is transmitted from the game control unit 100 to the effect control unit 130. To be done. In response to receiving this fluctuation start command, the effect control unit 130 starts fluctuation of the three decorative symbols 55 on the liquid crystal screen 5 (t0 in FIG. 33, FIG. 34(B)). Further, on the liquid crystal screen 5, the plurality of hold icons 51 are moved to the right side, respectively, and the rightmost hold icon 51 is displayed as the changing icon 53. Further, the number of holdings indicated by the holding number 52 decreases in response to the reception of the fluctuation start command. In addition, in the following drawings, the display of the reserved numeral 52 is omitted for simplification of the drawings.

A pre-reach effect is performed for a predetermined period (t0 to t1) from the start of variation of the decorative pattern 55. In the pre-reach effect, the three decorative patterns 55 change at high speed in the same manner as when the variation starts (the size is “medium” and no character is present) (FIG. 34(B)), and after a predetermined time has elapsed, the left region The decorative pattern 55 is temporarily stopped (FIG. 34(C)), and the reach-inspiring effect of whether or not the decorative pattern 55 of the same type as the left region is temporarily stopped is performed in the right region (FIG. 34(D)). When the decorative design 55 of the same type as the left area is temporarily stopped in the right area as a result of the reach twisting effect, reach is established (t1 in FIG. 33, FIG. 34(E)). The details of the effect after the reach is established will be described later, but only the outline will be described below.

When the reach is established, for example, a battle start effect indicating that the battle effect between the character A and the character B is started is performed (FIG. 34(F)), and the battle effect is started (t2 in FIG. 33, FIG. 33). 34 (G)). The reliability of the probability variation jackpot is suggested by the opponent character (character B in the figure) in this battle effect. During the battle effect, a moving image effect in which the character A and the character B fight each other is performed on the screen. During the battle production, the decorative pattern 55 is displayed in a character-less mode with a size of “small” on the left and right of the screen, for example. Note that the decorative design 55 may not be displayed during the battle production.

When the battle effect is performed for a predetermined time, the final effect of the battle effect is determined (t3 in FIG. 33, FIG. 34(H)). This decision effect is an effect that fuels whether or not the character A wins over the character B, and is an effect different from the decision effect in the normal gaming state (FIG. 24(J) above). In the finalized effect, as shown in FIG. 34(H), for example, an operation promotion effect that prompts the player to operate the effect button 26 (for example, display of the operation promotion image 65 and the effective period image 651) may be performed. .. This operation promotion effect may be the same effect as the operation promotion effect in the normal gaming state (FIG. 24(J)), or may be a different effect.

In response to an operation on the effect button 26 in the finalized effect, or when a predetermined time has elapsed, the winning notification is given. In the case of a big hit, the hit notification is given as the winning notification (t4 in FIG. 33, FIG. 34(I)).

Specifically, as an example of winning notification, a winning effect is performed at time t4. The winning effect is an effect for notifying that the character A has won in the battle effect. In the winning effect, a symbol-matching effect in which the three decorative symbols 55 are matched is performed. Specifically, the decorative pattern 55 of the same kind as the left and right decorative patterns 55 is temporarily stopped in the middle area, and the effect image 60 is displayed around the middle area decorative pattern 55. The effect image 60 may be an image different from the effect image 60 (FIG. 24(K)) at the time of hit notification in the normal gaming state, or the same image.

At time t4, instead of the symbol-matching effect, an accessory operation effect in which the movable accessory 7 is operated may be performed as the winning effect.

Further, the accessory operation effect may be performed immediately after the symbol matching effect is performed. That is, the jackpot may be notified using the movable accessory 7 immediately after the jackpot is notified using the decorative pattern 55.

After the symbol-matching effect or the accessory operation effect, the first light-emission effect is performed (t5 in FIG. 33, FIG. 35(J)). The first light emission effect is an effect performed on the decorative pattern 55 and is an effect that emphasizes the decorative pattern 55. For example, the first light emission effect may be an effect in which the effect image 61 is displayed around each of the decorative patterns 55 so that the three decorative patterns 55 emit light in the same emission color. The three decorative symbols 55 in the first light emission effect are of a size “large” and are displayed in a mode without characters, and the intermediate region decorative symbol 55 is displayed larger than the left and right decorative symbols 55.

The first light emission effect may be the same as the first light emission effect in the normal gaming state (FIG. 24(L)) or may be a different effect. The execution time of the first light emission effect (FIG. 35(J)) in the probability variation game state may be shorter or longer than the execution time of the first light emission effect (FIG. 24(L)) in the normal game state. But they can be the same.

After the first light emission effect, the three decorative patterns 55 swing for a predetermined period (FIG. 35(K)). While the three decorative patterns 55 are swinging, the three decorative patterns 55 have a size of “medium” and have no character. Then, the re-lottery effect is performed (t6 in FIG. 33, FIG. 35(L)). In the re-lottery effect, an effect that fluctuates in a state in which three decorative symbols 55 of the same type are gathered is performed, and an effect that causes the player to expect which type of three decorative symbols will be stopped is performed.

After the re-lottery effect is performed, three decorative symbols 55 of any one of a plurality of types are stopped together. At this time, the second first light emission effect is performed (t7 in FIG. 33, FIG. 35(M)). Similar to the case where the re-lottery effect is performed in the normal game state, the second light emission effect of the second time (FIG. 35(M)) performed at time t7 is the first light emission effect of the first time performed at time t5 ( The effect may be different from that of FIG. 35(J) or the same effect. In the second light-emitting effect of the second time as well, like the first light-emitting effect of the first time, the three decorative patterns 55 are the size “large” and displayed in the character-less mode, and the decorative pattern of the middle area 55 is displayed largest.

After the second light emission effect of the second time is performed, the three decorative symbols 55 swing (t8 in FIG. 33, FIG. 35(N)), and then, the three decorative symbols according to the stop of the second special symbol. The design 55 is stopped (t9 in FIG. 33, FIG. 35(O)). During this time t8 to t9, the three decorative symbols 55 are of a size “medium” and are displayed in a character-less mode. The time from the first light emission effect is performed in the probability variation game state until the decorative pattern 55 is permanently stopped (the swinging period of the three decoration symbols 55) is the decoration after the first light emission effect is performed in the normal game state. It is shorter than the time until the design 55 is stopped. Then, an opening effect that suggests that the jackpot game is started is performed (FIG. 35(P)).

33 and FIG. 35, the case where the re-lottery effect is performed and the first light emission effect is performed twice in the hit notification in the probability variation game state has been described, but the re-lottery effect is not performed and the first light emission effect is performed. May be performed only once. Also, in the probability variation game state, the second light emission effect may be performed after the first light emission effect.

FIG. 36: is a figure which shows an example of the flow of the fluctuating effect when a 2nd light emission effect is performed after a 1st light emission effect, when a hit notification is performed in a probability variation game state. As shown in FIG. 36, after the first light emission effect is performed between times t5 and t6, the second light emission effect is performed at time t7. Then, after the second light emission effect, the three decorative symbols 55 swing, and the three decorative symbols 55 are permanently stopped in response to the stop of the special symbol. The time from the second light emitting effect is performed in the probability variation game state until the decorative pattern 55 is completely stopped (the swinging period of the three decorative symbols 55) is the decoration after the second light emitting effect is performed in the normal game state. It is shorter than the time until the design 55 is stopped.

Here, the second light emission effect in the probability variation game state is the same effect as the second light emission effect described in the normal game state, and is brighter than the decorative pattern 55 itself so that part of each decorative pattern 55 emits light. This is an effect in which the effect image 62 (FIG. 24(N)) is displayed. The effect image displayed in the second light emission effect in the probability variation game state may be an image different from the effect image 62 displayed in the second light emission effect in the probability variation game state.

Further, even when the second light emission effect is performed in the probability variation gaming state, the re-lottery effect may be performed after the first light emission effect of the first time, and the second light emission effect of the second time may be performed after the re-lottery effect. .. Specifically, in this case, after the winning effect, the first light emitting effect is performed for the first time, and then the re-lottery effect is performed. After the re-lottery effect, the second first light emission effect is performed, and then the second light emission effect is further performed, and the three decorative symbols 55 are permanently stopped.

Further, when it is determined that the probability variation big hit in the probability variation game state, the first light emission effect may not be performed, and only the second light emission effect may be performed.

Next, the variation effect when it is determined to be a 4R normal jackpot by the special symbol determination in the probability variation game state will be described. FIG. 37 is a diagram showing an example of the effect displayed on the screen when it is determined that the 4R normal jackpot is hit in the probability variation gaming state. For effects before the decided effect in FIG. 37(H), effects similar to those in FIGS. 34(B) to (G) are performed.

When it is determined that the 4R normal jackpot in the special symbol determination in the probability variation gaming state, the variation pattern OP6 is selected as the variation pattern of the special symbol, and the variation effect is started. In this case, similarly to FIG. 33, the pre-reach effect, the battle start effect, and the battle effect are sequentially performed, and the final effect (FIG. 37(H)) is performed in the final stage of the battle effect.

Then, after the final production of the battle production, at time t4, the defeat production is carried out as a hit notification (4R normal jackpot notification) (FIG. 37 (I-2)). In the defeat production, a moving image showing that character A has been defeated is displayed. Also, in the defeat production, decorative patterns different from the left and right are stopped in the middle area, which results in reach loss. The reach loss eye in this probability variation game state indicates that the result of the special symbol determination is not a loss but a 4R normal jackpot. When a decorative pattern different from the left and right stops in the middle area, the effect image is not displayed around the decoration pattern in the middle area. When a decorative pattern different from the left and right stops in the middle area, an effect image may be displayed around the decorative pattern in the middle area. The effect image displayed at this time may be an image different from or the same as the effect image 60 (FIG. 34(I)) displayed in the win effect. Further, when the defeat production is performed, the first light emission production and the second light emission production are not performed. After the defeat production, the screen is switched at the start of the fluctuation of the special symbol in the probability variation game state, and the three decorative symbols sway in the state where the decorative symbols of different kinds from the left and right are stopped in the middle area (Fig. 37 (J- 2)). Then, in accordance with the stop of the special symbol, the three decorative symbols 55 are permanently stopped, and the three small symbols 56 are also permanently stopped (FIG. 37(O)). Next, the opening effect is performed (FIG. 37(P)), and the jackpot game related to the 4R normal jackpot is started. During the jackpot game related to the opening effect and the 4R regular jackpot, a display prompting the player to hit the right is displayed. Further, as shown in the figure, a result display showing the total number of award balls, the number of jackpots, etc., which the player has acquired after shifting to the probability variation game state, is displayed. In the probability variation game state, when the 4R normal jackpot is hit, in the jackpot game related to the 4R regular jackpot, the opening time of the special winning opening 13 per 1R is short (for example, 0.5 seconds), and most players win the prize. You may not be able to get the ball. Further, in the probability variation gaming state, when the 4R normal jackpot is hit, the maximum winning opening 13 per 1R is a maximum opening time of 29.5 seconds, and the player may be able to win the 4R prize balls. .. In this case, instead of the result display shown in FIG. 37(P), a big hit effect showing a 4R normal big hit may be performed.

(Lamp emission during warning notification)
Here, the lamp light emission effect during the hit notification will be described in detail. As described above, during the hit notification, a lamp light emission effect is performed in which the panel lamp 25 and/or the frame lamp 37 emit light in a light emission pattern (for example, a light emission pattern that emits iridescent light) that suggests a big hit. The lamp emission effect related to the hit notification is performed at the timing when the hit notification is started (t7 in FIG. 22, T7-1 in FIG. 30, t4 in FIG. 33). Specifically, the command is transmitted from the effect control unit 130 to the lamp control unit 150 at the timing when the hit notification is started (for example, the timing at which the effect button 26 is operated), and the lamp control unit 150 responds to the command. Based on this, execution of the lamp light emission effect is started.

More specifically, the lamp light emission effect related to the hit notification is divided into effect corresponding to each effect of the symbol-matching effect (or accessory effect operation effect), the first light emission effect, and the second light emission effect. For example, when the effect button 26 is operated while the screen of FIG. 24(J) is displayed, the lamp control unit 150 is shown in FIG. 24(K) in response to a command from the effect control unit 130. The lamp light emission effect corresponding to the symbol-matching effect (or the accessory operation effect in which the movable accessory 7 appears on the front surface of the screen) is executed. Next, at the timing when the predetermined period has elapsed, the lamp control unit 150 executes the lamp light emission effect corresponding to the first light emission effect (FIG. 24(L)). Further, when the predetermined period has elapsed, the lamp control unit 150 executes the lamp light emission effect corresponding to the second light emission effect (FIG. 24(N)). The lamp emission effect in each of these periods may be different. For example, the board lamp 25 and/or the frame lamp 37 emits light in the first light emission pattern (for example, red) during the symbol alignment effect (or accessory operation effect) shown in FIG. 24(K), and the first light emission effect. Light may be emitted in the second light emission pattern (for example, white) inside, and may be emitted in the third light emission pattern (for example, rainbow color) during the second light emission effect. Note that the board lamp 25 and/or the frame lamp 37 have the same light emission pattern (from the start of the symbol matching effect (or the accessory operation effect) shown in FIG. 24(K) until the decorative symbol 55 is stopped. For example, it may emit light in a rainbow color. For example, the lamp light emission effects during the symbol-matching effect, the first light emission effect, and the second light emission effect are the same (for example, the light emission pattern in which the board lamp 25 and/or the frame lamp 37 emits rainbow colors). Good.

That is, the lamp light emission effect is performed in conjunction with the winning light emission effect (first light emission effect and second light emission effect). Here, "two effects interlock" means that when one effect is performed, the other effect corresponding to the one effect is performed. The mode of “interlocking” may be, for example, a mode of using the same color, or if a player who knows the pachinko gaming machine 1 using different colors sees one effect, the other effect is being performed. The “closely related aspect” may be recognizable. Specifically, one example of the “mode in which the same color is used” is a panel lamp with a lamp light emission effect corresponding to the first light emission effect, which is the same white as the effect image 61 related to the first light emission effect with the first light emission effect. 25 and/or the frame lamp 37 emits light. In addition, an example of the “closely related aspect” is, for example, with the second light emission effect that displays the white effect image 62, in the light emission pattern of the iridescent light for the second light emission effect, the panel lamp 25 and/or Alternatively, the frame lamp 37 is made to emit light. In addition, in the present embodiment, if one effect (for example, lamp light emission) can recognize the other effect (for example, winning light emission effect), it is included in conjunction. For this reason, the two interlocking effects may be in a relationship in which they are exclusive effects (that is, a one-to-one relationship), or one relationship in which they are exclusive effects for the other but the opposite is not true (a one-to-many relationship). But it's okay.

The start timing and end timing of the two interlocking effects do not necessarily have to match. The effect controlled by the image and sound control unit 140 and the effect controlled by the lamp control unit 150 are synchronized only at a predetermined timing, and after the predetermined timing, the time managed by each control unit elapses. May be controlled accordingly. For example, the lamp light emission effect controlled by the lamp control unit 150 is started according to the command transmitted at the timing when the hit notification is started (for example, the timing when the operation of the effect button 26 is performed). After the lamp light emission effect is started according to the command, the lamp control unit 150 controls the lamp light emission effect according to the passage of time. Further, at the same timing, the image and sound control unit 140 performs the symbol matching effect shown in FIG. 24(K), and thereafter, the first light emission effect and the second light emission effect are performed in accordance with the passage of time. These two effects are synchronized only at a predetermined timing, and after the predetermined timing, they are controlled according to the lapse of time managed by each control unit. Note that the two effects may be executed in synchronization with each other during execution of the effects. When the two effects are executed in synchronization with each other, for example, at the timing when the image shown in FIG. 24L is displayed on the liquid crystal screen 5, the lamp control unit 150 via the effect control unit 130 from the audiovisual control unit 140. To the lamp control unit 150, and the lamp control unit 150 executes the lamp light emission effect corresponding to the first light emission effect in response to the command. Further, at the timing when the image shown in FIG. 24(N) is displayed on the liquid crystal screen 5, a control command is transmitted from the audiovisual control unit 140 to the lamp control unit 150 via the effect control unit 130, and in response to the command. The lamp control unit 150 executes the lamp light emission effect corresponding to the second light emission effect.

In addition, the lamp emission effect related to the hit notification ends in response to the start of the big hit game. Specifically, the lamp light emission effect ends in response to the variation stop command or the opening command being transmitted from the game control unit 100 to the effect control unit 130.

In the present embodiment, the two effects may be "non-interlocking". For example, a specific example will be described in which the board lamp 25 and the frame lamp 37 continuously emit light in the emission pattern interlocking with the BGM that is continuously output from before the start of the N reach production with the N reach production. In such a case, it can be recognized from the state of the liquid crystal screen 5 that the N reach effect is being performed. On the other hand, it cannot be recognized from the light emission mode of the panel lamp 25 or the like that the N reach effect is being performed. In this way, it is difficult for a player who knows the pachinko gaming machine 1 to recognize that the other effect (for example, N reach effect) is being performed even if one player (for example, the light emission of the panel lamp 25 or the like) is seen. In some cases, these two effects are "non-interlocking".

In addition, the reliability may be suggested by a lamp light emission effect related to the hit notification. For example, each of the first to third light emission patterns of the lamp light emission effect related to the hit notification described above may be a light emission pattern using rainbow colors.

(Characteristics of luminescence production)
The hit light emission effect (first light emission effect and second light emission effect) in the normal game state and the hit light emission effect (first light emission effect and second light emission effect) in the probability variation game state have been described above. The features of these light emission effects will be described below.

The display mode of the decorative pattern 55 is different between the first light emission effect and the second light emission effect which are being notified of the hit. For example, in both the normal game state and the probability variation game state, the three decorative symbols 55 in the first light emitting effect are larger (or smaller) than the three decorative symbols in the second light emitting effect. Further, in the normal game state, the three decorative symbols 55 at the time of the first light emission effect may be a mode without a character, while the three decorative symbols 55 at the time of the second light emission effect may be a mode with a character. Further, in both the normal game state and the probability variation game state, the visibility of the decorative pattern 55 in the middle region during the first light emission effect is higher than the visibility of the left and right decorative patterns 55, while three in the second light emission effect. The visibility of the decorative pattern 55 is the same. Specifically, the decoration pattern 55 of the middle area during the first light emission effect is larger than the left and right decoration patterns 55, and the whole (or most of) the decoration pattern 55 of the middle area is displayed on the screen. Since part of the left and right decorative designs 55 in the first light emission effect is not displayed on the screen, it can be said that the decorative design 55 in the middle area has higher visibility than the left and right decorative designs 55. On the other hand, during the second light emission effect, it can be said that the three decorative patterns 55 have the same size and the three decorative patterns 55 have the same visibility.

Further, in both the normal game state and the probability variation game state, the area in which the effect image 61 in the first light emission effect is displayed is larger than the area in which the effect image 62 in the second light emission effect is displayed. Specifically, in the second light emission effect, the effect image 62 is displayed in a part of each decorative pattern 55, while in the first light emission effect, a relatively wide area around each decorative pattern 55. At, the effect image 61 is displayed.

Further, in the normal game state, the decorative design 55 in the first light emitting effect is a character-less mode in which no character is added to the numeral design, and the decorative design 55 in the second light emitting effect is added to the character in the numerical design. It is a mode with characters. The decorative design 55 during the second light emitting effect in the normal gaming state may be a character-less mode in which no character is added to the numerical design. Further, in the probability variation game state or the time saving game state, the decorative pattern 55 in the first light emitting effect is a character-less mode in which no character is added to the numerical pattern, and the decorative pattern 55 in the second light emitting effect is also a character in the numerical pattern. In this mode, no character is added.

In the normal gaming state, the first light emission effect and the second light emission effect are performed during the hit notification. In the probability variation gaming state, the first light emission effect may be performed while the second light emission effect is not performed during the hit notification. In the probability variation game state, the first light emission effect may not be performed and the second light emission effect may be performed during the hit notification. In the probability variation game state, both the first light emission effect and the second light emission effect may be performed. For example, in the probability variation game state, there may be a time when the second light emission effect is performed and a time when the second light emission effect is not performed after the first light emission effect is performed.

Further, the execution time of the first light emission effect is different from the execution time of the second light emission effect. “Different execution time” means that at least one of the length of time required to execute each effect and the execution timing is different. Specifically, the execution time of the second light emission effect is longer than the execution time of the first light emission effect. The execution time of the second light emission effect may be shorter than the execution time of the first light emission effect.

In addition, the execution time of the first light emission effect and/or the second light emission effect may differ depending on the game state. For example, the execution time of the second light emission effect may differ depending on the game state. For example, in the normal game state and the time saving game state, the execution time of the second light emission effect may be the same, while in the probability variation game state, the execution time of the second light emission effect may be shorter than that in the normal game state. On the other hand, the execution time of the first light emission effect may be the same in all game states. The execution time of the first light emission effect may differ depending on the game state, while the execution time of the second light emission effect may be the same in all the game states.

Further, the time from the start (or the end) of the first light emission effect to the start of the second light emission effect may be the same time regardless of the gaming state of the gaming machine 1. Further, the time from the start (or the end) of the first light emission effect to the start of the second light emission effect may be different depending on the game state. For example, the time from the start (or the end) of the first light emission effect in the normal game state to the start of the second light emission effect is the second light emission from the start (or the end) of the first light emission effect in the probability variation game state. It may be longer (or shorter) than the time until the start of production.

In addition, the effect mode of the first light emission effect itself and the effect mode of the second light emission effect itself are different. The effect mode of the first light emission effect here may be the type, color or size of the effect image 61, and the sound output during the first light emission effect. The same applies to the effect mode of the second light emission effect. For example, the effect image 61 displayed around the decorative pattern 55 in the first light emission effect and the effect image 62 added to the decorative pattern 55 in the second light emission effect are different images.

Further, the light emitting mode of the decorative pattern 55 is different between the first light emitting effect and the second light emitting effect. For example, in the first light emission effect, the whole of the three decorative patterns 55 instantaneously emits light (the periphery of each decorative pattern 55 instantaneously emits light). On the other hand, in the second light emission effect, each decorative pattern 55 simultaneously emits light, for example, from top to bottom (the light emitting portion of the decorative pattern 55 moves from top to bottom). Further, the effect image 61 in the first light emission effect is displayed centering on the decorative pattern 55 in the middle area and beyond the area of the decorative pattern 55. On the other hand, the effect image 62 in the second light emission effect is displayed in the area of each decorative pattern 55.

In addition, the effect mode of the first light emission effect and/or the effect mode of the second light emission effect may be the same or different regardless of the game state. For example, the production mode of the first light emission production may be the same in the normal gaming state and the probability variation gaming state. In addition, the production mode of the second light emission production may be the same in the normal game state and the probability variation game state. The production mode of the second light emission effect is the same in the normal game state and the probability variation game state, while the production mode of the first light emission effect may be different in the normal game state and the probability variation game state. On the contrary, the effect mode of the first light emission effect is the same in the normal game state and the probability variation game state, while the effect mode of the second light emission effect may be different in the normal game state and the probability variation game state.

Further, the number of times of execution of the first light emission effect and the second light emission effect performed in one variation of the special symbol (big hit variation) may be the same in all game states, or may be different depending on the game state. Good. For example, in the normal gaming state, the number of executions of the first light emission effect may be greater than the number of executions of the second light emission effect in one change of the special symbol (big hit change). For example, in the normal game state, the first light emission effect may be performed twice and the second light emission effect may be performed once in one variation of the special symbol (big hit variation). Further, in the probability variation game state, the number of times of execution of the first light emission effect and the number of times of execution of the second light emission effect in one variation of the special symbol may be the same. For example, in the probability variation gaming state, the first light emission effect and the second light emission effect may each be performed once in one variation of the special symbol (big hit variation). Further, in the probability variation gaming state, in one variation of the special symbol (big hit variation), the first light emission effect may be performed once or twice, and the second light emission effect may not be executed.

Further, the time from the start (or the end) of the first light emission effect until the three decorative symbols 55 are stopped (the swing period of the decorative symbol 55) may be the same in all the game states. , May differ depending on the gaming state. Further, the swing time from the end of the first light emission effect to the start of the second light emission effect may be the same in all the game states, or may be different depending on the game state. Further, the time from the start (or the end) of the second light emission effect until the three decorative symbols 55 are completely stopped may be the same in all the game states, or may be different depending on the game states. Good. Further, the time from the start (or the end) of the first light emission effect until the three decorative symbols 55 are permanently stopped varies depending on the game state, while the time (or the end) of the second light emission effect is started. The time from the three decorative symbols 55 to the stop may be the same in all game states. On the contrary, the time from the start (or the end) of the second light emission effect until the three decorative symbols 55 are permanently stopped varies depending on the game state, while the start (or the end time) of the first light emission effect. ) To the time when the three decorative symbols 55 are completely stopped may be the same in all game states.

In addition, when the big hit is notified by the accessory action effect instead of the symbol matching effect, the first light emission effect may not be performed during the accessory action effect. That is, when notifying the big hit immediately after the decided effect, if the big hit is notified by using the movable accessory instead of the decorative pattern 55, the first light emission effect may not be performed. In this case, when the re-lottery effect is performed, the first light emission effect immediately after the re-lottery effect may be performed. Also, when the re-lottery effect is performed, the first light emission effect immediately after the re-lottery effect may not be performed.

In addition, in the first light emission effect and the second light emission effect, even if the three types of the decorative patterns 55 to be stopped are the first decorative patterns (decorative patterns that suggest a jackpot that is more advantageous to the player), the second The decorative pattern (a decorative pattern that suggests a jackpot that is not advantageous to the player) is also performed. For example, even when three odd-numbered symbols (for example, “3” symbols) are stopped together, even when three even-numbered symbols (for example, “4” symbols) are stopped together, the first light emission effect and the second light emission. The performance is executed. The odd symbol is a symbol showing that it is a jackpot that is more advantageous to the player than the even symbol. Specifically, in the normal game state, if three odd symbols are arranged, it suggests that the odd change game state is transitioned to after the big hit game, and if three even symbols are arranged, the time is shortened after the big hit game. Suggests the possibility of transitioning to the gaming state. Further, in the probability variation gaming state, 10R probability variation jackpot is suggested when three “7” symbols are arranged, and 4R probability variation jackpot is suggested when three other symbols are arranged. In the normal game state, the first light emitting effect and/or the second light emitting effect when three odd symbols are stopped in a line, the first light emitting effect when three even symbols are stopped in a line and It may be different from or the same as the production mode of the second light emission production. In addition, for the first light emission effect, the effect mode may be different depending on the type of the decorative pattern to be stopped, and for the second light effect effect, the effect mode may be the same regardless of the type of the stopped decorative pattern. On the contrary, for the second light emission effect, the effect mode differs depending on the type of the decorative design to be stopped, and for the first light emission effect, the effect mode may be the same regardless of the type of the stopped decorative design. Also in the probability variation gaming state, similarly, when three symbols suggesting 10R probability variation jackpot (more advantageous jackpot for the player) are stopped together, and 4R probability variation jackpot (a jackpot less advantageous than 10R probability variation jackpot). The effect mode of the first light emission effect and/or the second light emission effect may be different when the three suggested symbols are stopped together.

Further, as described above, in the probability variation gaming state, the first symbol combination (symbol alignment) indicates a probability variation jackpot, and after the symbol alignment is achieved, a hit light emission effect (first light emission effect or second light emission effect) is performed. That is, the second symbol combination (reach lost eyes) usually indicates a big hit, indicating that no hit light emission effect is performed.

In addition, in the present embodiment, a first decorative design (for example, an odd design other than "7") indicating a 10R probability variation big hit or a 4R probability variation jackpot and a second decoration design (for example, an even number) that suggests the possibility of a 4R normal jackpot. There is a third decorative design (for example, "7" design) indicating that it is a 10R probability variation jackpot. When three first decorative symbols are stopped together, or when two second decorative symbols are stopped together, the production mode of the first light emission production is the first mode, and the third decoration When all three symbols are stopped, the effect mode of the first light emission effect may be the second mode different from the first mode. That is, when all the symbols other than the third decorative symbol that suggest the most advantageous jackpot for the player are stopped together, the effect mode of the first light emission effect is the same first case when any decorative symbol is stopped. When the third decorative symbols are stopped together, the effect mode of the first light emission effect may be the second mode different from the first mode. In addition, the production mode of the second light emission production may be the same when any of the first to third decorative designs is stopped together. Also, the production mode of the second light emission effect is the first mode and the third decoration pattern is stopped when the first or second decorative design is stopped, similarly to the production mode of the first light emission effect. If so, the second mode may be adopted.

Further, when the big hit is notified by the symbol arrangement, at least one of the first light emission effect and the second light emission effect is surely executed in all the game states. On the other hand, if the big hit is not notified by the symbol alignment (reach lost or big hit accompanied by transition to the normal game state in the probability variation game state), neither the first light emission effect nor the second light emission effect is executed. Further, in the normal game state, the first light emission effect and/or the second light emission effect may be executed in the case of a normal big hit, while in the probability variation game state, the first light emission effect and the second light emission in the case of a normal big hit. Neither of the effects is executed.

In addition, the output timing and output time of the sounds (first hit light emission effect sound, second hit light emission effect sound) output along with the first light emission effect and the second light emission effect may be different depending on the game state. For example, in the normal gaming state, after the output of the first hit light emission effect sound associated with the first light emission effect is finished, the output of the second hit light emission effect sound associated with the second light emission effect is started. On the other hand, in the probability variation game state, the output of the second hit light emission effect sound associated with the second light emission effect may be started during the output of the first hit light effect effect associated with the first light emission effect.

As described above, the hit light emission effect (first light emission effect and second light emission effect) is executed on the liquid crystal screen 5 during the hit notification. When the decorative pattern 55 is completely stopped, the hit light emission effect is terminated, so that it is possible to effectively notify the player of the big hit without hindering the visibility of the decorative pattern 55 when the decorative pattern 55 is permanently stopped. It is possible to improve the enjoyment.

Although details will be described later, in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, in addition to the hit light emission effect during the hit notification, another light emission effect for the decorative pattern 55 is performed at a timing different from that during the hit notification. By performing these various light emitting effects, it is possible to perform various effects using the decorative pattern at each timing, which can increase the expectation of the player and improve the fun.

(Lighting effect during non-reach)
Next, the non-reach light emission effect in the present embodiment will be described. The non-reach light emission effect is an effect that suggests that the decorative symbol 55 is temporarily stopped during the variable display of the special symbol. In the present embodiment, regardless of the game state, the non-reach light emission effect is performed in "when the decorative symbol 55 is displayed" in "when not in the reach state". "When the reach state is not reached" means that the reach state has disappeared because the reach has not been established even after the variable display of the special symbol has started, and the decorative pattern 55 has started the variable display again after the reach is established. Including cases and. Further, "when the decorative design 55 is displayed" means that the decorative design 55 is displayed (that is, not displayed), the timing at which the decorative design 55 is displayed, and the decorative design 55 is displayed. Including the case immediately before.

In the present embodiment, the non-reach light emission effect is executed when the reach state is not set. That is, it is possible to display the decorative pattern 55 in a mode that does not notify that the jackpot is a big hit. In this respect, the execution timing is different from the hit light emission effect executed when displaying the large-decoration mode decorative design 55 and the reach light emission effect (described later) executed when displaying the reach-mode decorative pattern 55. Further, the non-reach medium emission effect is different in function from the chance eye effect (that is, the pre-reading chance eye effect and the chance eye effect, which will be described later) that indicates the reliability in that it does not indicate the reliability of the big hit. Further, the non-reach light emission effect in the present embodiment can be executed regardless of the variation pattern. In this respect, the execution conditions are different from the hit light emission effect, the reach light emission effect, and the chance eye effect.

When the non-reach light emission effect is executed, the effect image (hereinafter, referred to as “non-reach light emission effect image 70”) is displayed over the decorative pattern 55 over the period from the start to the end. (See FIG. 39(F)). Along with this, a non-reach light emitting effect sound (for example, a sound effect called “Shuuon”) is output from the speaker 24. In the present embodiment, the display time of the non-reach light emission effect image 70 and the output time of the non-reach light emission effect sound are the same. Note that the relationship between these times may be any relationship, and for example, the output time may be shorter or longer than the display time.

The non-reach light emission effect image 70 and the non-reach light emission effect sound are output only in the non-reach light emission effect. The non-reach medium emission effect image 70 is an image smaller than the effect images 60 to 64 related to the winning emission effect. In the present embodiment, the same non-existence is applied to any one of the left symbol that is the decorative symbol 55 in the left column, the right symbol that is the decorative symbol 55 in the right column, and the middle symbol that is the decorative symbol 55 in the middle column. Reaching emission effect sound is output. Therefore, depending on the non-reach light emission effect sound, it is not possible to know which design row the decorative design 55 to be temporarily stopped is. On the other hand, the non-reach medium-emission effect image 70 is displayed centering on the symbol sequence of the decorative pattern 55 suggesting temporary stop, but not centering on the symbol sequence not suggesting temporary stop. For example, in the non-reach medium emission effect image 70 that suggests that the decoration pattern 55 in the middle row is temporarily stopped, the non-reach medium emission effect image 70 is displayed centering on the middle column and centering on the left column (and right column). Do not show. For example, in a symbol sequence that does not suggest a temporary stop, only the edge portion of the non-reach medium emission effect image 70 may be displayed, or the non-reach medium emission effect image 70 may be displayed so as not to be applied. Good. In this way, it is possible to suggest which decorative row 55 of the decorative patterns is temporarily stopped by the non-reach light emission effect. In addition, you may change the aspect of the non-reach inside light emission production according to the kind of the decorative pattern 55. For example, the “7” symbol may have a non-reach medium emission effect image 70 and a non-reach medium emission effect sound different from those of the other decorative patterns 55.

In the present embodiment, the board lamp 25 and/or the frame lamp 37 emit light in a light emission pattern (for example, white blinking) for the light effect during non-reach during the light effect during non-reach. The light emission pattern for the non-reach medium light emission effect is different from the light emission patterns for other effects. Therefore, it is possible to recognize that the non-reach medium emission effect is being executed from the effect means other than the liquid crystal screen 5. In other words, the liquid crystal screen 5 and the panel lamp 25 and/or the frame lamp 37 correspond to (in conjunction with) the non-reach light emission effect.

It should be noted that the gaming machine 1 may not be provided with the light emission patterns of the panel lamp 25 and the frame lamp 37 for non-reach medium light emission effect. In this case, during the non-reach light emission effect, the board lamp 25 is used with another effect emission pattern (for example, an emission pattern corresponding (interlocking) with the BGM being output, or an emission pattern for displaying a normal background image). The frame lamp 37 may emit light. In the case of such a configuration, it is impossible to recognize that the non-reach light emission effect is being executed from the effect means other than the liquid crystal screen 5. That is, it can be said that the liquid crystal screen 5 and the panel lamp 25 and/or the frame lamp 37 do not correspond to each other in the non-reach light emission effect (non-interlocking).

In the present embodiment, the aspect of the non-reach medium light emission effect differs depending on the game state. Specifically, for example, the execution time of the non-reach light emitting effect itself is shorter in the probability variation game state than in the normal game state. For example, the execution time in the normal gaming state is 1 second, and the execution time in the probability variation gaming state is 0.5 seconds. The execution time of the non-reach light emitting effect may be longer or the same in the probability variation game state than in the normal game state. In this embodiment, the execution time of the non-reach light emission effect is shorter than the hit light emission effect time in any game state. Depending on the game state (or in any of the game states), the execution time of the hit light emission effect may be shorter or the same as the execution time of the light emission effect during non-reach.

Further, in the present embodiment, as the non-reach light emission effect image 70, an effect (for example, a light yellow image) such that the lower part of the corresponding decorative pattern 55 appears to be shining in the normal gaming state is a corresponding decorative pattern. It is superposed on the front side of 55 (see FIG. 39(E)). In the probability variation game state, an effect different from the above is displayed as the non-reaching light emission effect image 70. For example, an effect (for example, a white image) in which the corresponding decorative pattern 55 explodes from the lower portion so that the whole looks shining is superimposed and displayed on the front side of the corresponding decorative pattern 55 (FIG. 42 ( See C) and (D)). In the present embodiment, the non-reach light emitting effect sound is the same regardless of the game state. However, in the normal gaming state, the output time is shorter than that in the probability variation gaming state. Note that different non-reach light emitting effect sounds may be output depending on the game state.

Further, in the present embodiment, the "scroll speed" of the decorative design 55 when the non-reach light emission effect is started differs depending on the game state. The “scroll speed” is the speed when the decorative pattern 55 is moved in the vertical direction and the switching speed when the decorative pattern 55 is switched and displayed in the same place without being moved in the vertical direction. Is a concept that includes. For example, during the normal game state, the non-reach light emission effect image 70 is displayed for the temporarily stopped decorative pattern 55. During the probability variation game state, the non-reach light emission effect image 70 is displayed for the decorative pattern 55 that is changing at a low speed. The low-speed fluctuation is, for example, the scroll speed (fluctuation speed) of the decorative pattern 55 that allows the detailed aspect of the character image 551 and the number image 552 to be recognized (or to be easily recognized). For example, the time during which one decorative pattern is displayed on the liquid crystal screen 5 during high speed fluctuation is about 0.5 seconds. There is a high speed fluctuation at a speed faster than a low speed fluctuation. The high-speed fluctuation is, for example, a scroll speed (fluctuation speed) at which it is possible to recognize that the decorative pattern 55 is displayed in a variable manner, but cannot recognize (or difficult to recognize) even a fine aspect of the decorative pattern 55. For example, the time during which one decorative pattern is displayed on the liquid crystal screen 5 during high speed fluctuation is about 0.04 seconds. For example, the changing speed of the decorative symbol during high speed fluctuation is the same as the changing speed of the small symbol 56 (and the fourth symbol 57, 59). In the present embodiment, the decorative pattern that is temporarily stopped is not scrolled. Therefore, the scroll speed of the decorative pattern during the temporary stop is 0, and the temporary stop is not included in the low speed fluctuation in the present embodiment. In addition, when it is simply described as “display”, it includes provisional stop, low speed fluctuation, and high speed fluctuation. The variation speed of the small symbol 56 (and the fourth symbols 57 and 59) may be faster than the variation speed of the decorative symbol 55 during high-speed variation if it is faster than the variation rate of the decorative symbol 55 during low-speed variation. You may be late.

Next, with reference to FIG. 38 to FIG. 40, the non-reach light emitting effect in the normal game state will be described. First, the execution timing of the non-reach medium light emission effect in the normal game state will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 38 is a time chart for explaining the execution timing of the non-reach light emission effect in the normal game state. FIG. 39 is an explanatory diagram for explaining an example of a non-reach mid-light emission effect when three decorative symbols 55 are temporarily stopped in the normal game state. FIG. 40 is an explanatory diagram for explaining an example of the non-reach light emission effect in the case where the three decorative symbols 55 are temporarily stopped in the normal game state.

In FIG. 38(A), the movement of the decorative pattern 55 when the loss variation pattern HP1 is selected is shown. In the present embodiment, when the loss variation pattern HP1 is selected, the effect pattern of the decorative symbol 55 in which the left symbol, the right symbol, and the middle symbol are temporarily stopped at the same time is selected with a probability of 100%. In accordance with the variable display of the special symbol, the start effect of the mode according to the game state is executed in the present embodiment. The start effect in the present embodiment is an effect that emphasizes the decorative pattern 55 that starts variable display by swinging (that is, slightly changing) the decorative pattern 55. The start effect is also an effect that suggests that the decorative pattern 55 starts changing at high speed. For example, the start effect in the normal game state is executed for a predetermined execution time (for example, 1 second), and the decorative pattern 55 is swung by changing the pose of the character image 551 from the start time to the end time. Further, in the start effect in the normal game state, with the start thereof, the entire decorative pattern 55 becomes a little larger so as to bounce, and the size is maintained as it is until the start effect is completed. In the present embodiment, the start effect is finished in a state where the character image 551 is in a pose different from that at the start effect start time (that is, a pose different from that during the main stop). As illustrated in FIG. 38(A), with the end of the start effect, the decorative design 55 starts high-speed fluctuation in the same manner as at the end of the start effect (FIGS. 39(B) and (C)). reference). In the positioning of the size in FIG. 18, the decorative pattern 55 before the start effect start (that is, during the main stop) is a small “medium” and is larger than “small”. Further, the decorative pattern 55 that has been enlarged by the start effect is a large "medium" and smaller than "large". In this way, the decorative pattern 55 is the same mode at the start of fluctuation and during high speed fluctuation in that the size is "medium" even if the start effect is executed and the character is present. As the start effect, after the pose of the character image 551 is ended, an effect of changing the character image 551 to the same pose as that during the main stop may be executed at the end.

As illustrated in FIG. 38(A), in the present embodiment, the three decorative symbols 55 simultaneously start high-speed fluctuation with the end of the start effect. In the normal game state, the decorative pattern 55 changes at high speed while maintaining the size increased by the start effect and the pose of the character image 551 after the movement (see FIG. 39(C)). The decorative pattern 55 may change at a low speed between the end of the start effect and the start of the high speed change. In addition, the execution time of the start effect may be different for each symbol row. For example, when the execution time of the start effect is short in the order of the left symbol, the right symbol, and the middle symbol, the high speed fluctuation starts in the order of the left symbol, the right symbol, and the middle symbol. Further, the aspect of the decorative pattern 55 during high speed fluctuation may be the same as that during the main stop. For example, the mode of the decorative pattern 55 may be changed to the mode in which the main design is stopped with the end of the start effect, and high-speed fluctuation may be started.

As illustrated in FIG. 38A, when a predetermined time (for example, 2.5 seconds) elapses after the high speed fluctuation is started, the three decorative patterns 55 simultaneously change from the high speed fluctuation to the low speed fluctuation. In the present embodiment, the aspect of the decorative pattern 55 during the low speed fluctuation is the same as during the high speed fluctuation (see FIGS. 39C and 39D). During the low speed fluctuation, it is not yet known which decorative pattern 55 is temporarily stopped. Note that, for example, the low speed fluctuation may be started in the order of the left design, the right design, and the middle design, or even if the middle design is delayed and the low speed fluctuation starts after the left design and the right design simultaneously start the low speed variation. Good.

As illustrated in FIG. 38(A), when a predetermined time (for example, 2.5 seconds) elapses after the decorative pattern 55 starts low-speed fluctuation, the three decorative patterns 55 are temporarily stopped at the same time in a lost manner of reach failure. To do. In the normal game state, along with the temporary stop of the decorative design 55, the non-reach light emitting effect for the temporary design of the decorative design 55 (in this example, the left design, the right design, and the middle design) has a predetermined execution time (for example, 1 Seconds). This suggests that the three decorative patterns 55 are temporarily stopped for a predetermined time (for example, 2 seconds) thereafter. When the loss variation pattern HP1 is selected, all the decorative symbols 55 are provisionally stopped from the start of the non-reach light emission effect until the decorative symbol 55 is permanently stopped with the variable display of the special symbol. Note that the decorative pattern 55 may be temporarily stopped suddenly from high speed fluctuations without going through low speed fluctuations.

In the normal game state, a stop effect for changing the pose of the character image 551 is executed for a predetermined execution time (for example, 1 second) together with the non-reach light emitting effect. The stop effect in the present embodiment is an effect in which the character image 551 performs an operation different from the start effect (the same operation may be performed). In the present embodiment, the character image 551 has a different pose (specifically, for example, the same pose as during the main stop) from that at the start of the stop effect, and the stop effect ends (FIGS. 39(E) and (G)). ). When the stop effect is completed, the temporarily stopped character image 551 swings by continuing the action of inhaling and exhaling while maintaining the pose at the end of the stop effect. The number image 552 oscillates by repeating, for example, a slight enlargement and a slight reduction during the temporary stop regardless of whether or not the stop effect is being produced. In this way, in the normal game state, the decorative symbol 55 is temporarily stopped (swings) from the start of the non-reach light emission effect. The size of the number image 552 may be reduced (or increased) depending on the stop effect. Further, the non-reach light emitting effect may have a longer or shorter execution time than the stop effect. In addition, in the stop effect, the character image 551 may be changed to the same pose as when the start effect is ended at the end thereof.

In the present embodiment, when the variation pattern of the loss is selected in the normal game state, the three decorative symbols 55 are deflated at the same time before the predetermined time (for example, 0.7 seconds) before the main stop and the main stop is being performed. It is reduced to the same size (see FIG. 39(H)). When the decorative pattern 55 is squeezed as described above, the player can recognize that the fluctuation does not continue (that is, it does not develop into pseudo-relation and loses as it is). When the loss variation pattern HP1 is selected, the three decorative patterns 55 collapse when a predetermined time (0.3 seconds) elapses after the non-reach light emission effect is finished. In the positioning of the size in FIG. 18, the decorative pattern 55 after being deflated is a small “medium” and larger than “small”. The decorative pattern 55 remains at this size for a predetermined time (for example, 0.7 seconds later) and the decorative pattern 55 is permanently stopped in accordance with the stop display of the special symbol (see FIG. 39(I)). In addition, when a predetermined effect (for example, SP reach effect or SPSP reach effect) is executed, the decorative pattern 55 may not be the same as the above.

In FIG. 38(B), the movement of the decorative pattern 55 when the loss variation pattern HP2 is selected is shown. In this embodiment, when the loss variation pattern HP2 is selected, the effect pattern of the decorative symbol 55 that is temporarily stopped in the order of the left symbol, the right symbol, and the middle symbol is selected with a probability of 100%.

When the loss variation pattern HP2 is selected, similarly to the case of HP1, the start effect is executed along with the variation display of the special symbol, and then the three decorative symbols 55 are rapidly varied. Following the high-speed fluctuation, first the left symbol starts low-speed fluctuation. During the low speed fluctuation of the left symbol, the high speed fluctuation continues between the right symbol and the middle symbol. When a predetermined time (for example, 2.5 seconds) elapses after the left symbol starts changing at a low speed, the left symbol temporarily stops. Along with this, the non-reach medium emission effect for the left symbol is executed for a predetermined execution time (for example, 1 second). Along with this, a stop effect for changing the pose of the character image 551 of the left symbol is executed for a predetermined time (for example, 1 second). Note that the right symbol starts changing at a low speed with the temporary stop of the left symbol. Therefore, during the non-reach light emission effect for the left symbol, the left symbol is temporarily stopped (and is in the stop effect), the right symbol is changing at low speed, and the middle symbol is changing at high speed. The right symbol may change at a low speed after (or before) the start of the non-reach light emission effect for the left symbol.

As illustrated in FIG. 38(B), when a predetermined time (for example, 1.5 seconds) elapses after the non-reach light emission effect for the left symbol ends, the right symbol indicating a number different from the left symbol temporarily stops. .. Along with this, the light effect during non-reach for the right symbol is executed for a predetermined execution time (for example, 1 second). Along with this, a stop effect that changes the pose of the character image 551 of the right symbol is executed in a predetermined time (for example, 1 second). Note that the middle symbol starts changing at a low speed with the temporary stop of the right symbol. For this reason, during the non-reach medium emission effect for the right symbol, the left symbol is temporarily stopped (and after the stop effect is finished), the right symbol is temporarily stopped (and is in the stop effect), and the middle symbol is low speed fluctuation. In the middle. The middle symbol may change at a low speed after (or before) the start of the non-reach light emission effect for the right symbol.

As illustrated in FIG. 38(B), when a predetermined time (for example, 1.5 seconds) elapses after the non-reach medium emission effect for the right symbol ends, the medium symbol temporarily stops. Along with this, the non-reach medium emission effect for the middle symbol is executed for a predetermined execution time (for example, 1 second). Along with this, a stop effect for changing the pose of the character image 551 of the middle pattern is executed for a predetermined time (for example, 1 second). During the non-reach light emission effect for the medium symbol, the left symbol and the right symbol are in temporary stop (and after the stop effect), and the middle symbol is in temporary stop (and in the stop effect). When a predetermined time (0.3 seconds) elapses after the non-reach medium emission effect for the medium pattern is finished, the three decorative patterns 55 are slightly deflated as a whole as in the case where the loss variation pattern HP1 is selected. It becomes smaller (see FIG. 40(G)). Then, the decorative symbol 55 is permanently stopped with the stop display of the special symbol (see FIG. 40(H)).

Next, a specific example of the effect illustrated in FIG. 38A will be described with reference to FIG. 39. FIG. 39(A) illustrates a state in which the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in the state where the first special symbol is held. At this time, the three decorative symbols 55 are permanently stopped in a losing manner, and the small symbols 56 of the same combination as the decorative symbol 55 are permanently stopped. Along with this, the fourth symbols 57 and 59 indicating the loss are stopped and displayed. Note that, as illustrated in FIG. 39(A), in the decorative pattern 55 in the lost form, the middle pattern may be permanently stopped at the screen upper side than the left pattern (and the right pattern). When the decorative pattern 55 of the big hit mode is temporarily stopped (and finally stopped), the three decorative patterns 55 are arranged in a straight line. The small symbol 56 is always stopped in a straight line regardless of whether it is a big hit or not. Like the small design 56, the decorative design 55 may be always stopped in a straight line regardless of whether or not it is a big hit. In addition, the middle symbol during the main stop may be superimposed and displayed on the front side of the left symbol and the right symbol, or may be superimposed and displayed on the rear side.

In the example of FIG. 39(A), the reserved numeral 52 is displayed at the lower right corner of the liquid crystal screen 5. In this example, the holding number 52 indicates that the number of reservations for the first special symbol determination is 3, and the number of reservations for the second special symbol determination is 0. It should be noted that the number of reserved special symbols is not increased during the performance illustrated in the figure. When a predetermined fixed stop period (for example, 0.5 seconds) elapses after the first special symbol is stopped and displayed, the start effect is started along with the variable display of the first special symbol. FIG. 39(B) exemplifies a state in which the character image 551 is moved or the decorative pattern 55 is enlarged due to the start effect. As illustrated in FIG. 39(B), in the present embodiment, when the start effect is started in the normal game state, the middle symbol is superimposed and displayed on the front side of the left symbol and the right symbol. In addition, the small symbol 56 starts changing at high speed with the start of the start effect. At the same time, an animation in which the hold icon 51 is moved to the right so that the earliest hold icon 51 is displayed as the changing icon 53 is displayed. Along with this, the value of the number reservation 52 indicating the number of reservations of the first special symbol determination is decreased by 1.

As is clear from a comparison between (A) and (B) of FIG. 39, the size of the decorative pattern 55 is larger during the start effect than during the regular stop. Further, as illustrated in FIG. 39(C), the decorative pattern 55 during high speed fluctuation is the same as that at the end of the start effect. Note that, as illustrated in FIG. 39(B), the decorative patterns 55 other than the decorative pattern 55 that has been stopped are not displayed during the main stop and during the start effect, and the display is started at the start of high-speed fluctuation. R.

As illustrated in FIGS. 39(C) to (E), the decorative pattern 55 that has changed at high speed with the end of the start effect temporarily suspends the three decorative patterns 55 at the same time via the low speed change. During low speed fluctuation and temporary stop, the middle symbol is superimposed and displayed on the front side of the left symbol and the right symbol. 39 is an example of the case where the loss variation pattern HP1 is selected, the decorative pattern 55 is temporarily stopped in the non-reach loss mode. When the non-reach mid-light emission effect for each decorative pattern 55 is executed along with the temporary stop, as illustrated in FIGS. 39E and 39F, the non-reach mid-light effect image 70 causes the three decorative patterns 55 to be displayed. The bottom part looks shiny. FIG. 39(E) illustrates the manner in which the non-reach light emission effect and the stop effect are started along with the temporary stop. In addition, FIG. 39(F) illustrates the state immediately after FIG. 39(E) (note that during non-reach light emission effect and during stop effect). In addition, FIG. 39G illustrates a state immediately after the end of the non-reach light emission effect and the stop effect. As illustrated in FIGS. 39(G) to 39(I), the decorative pattern 55 is fully stopped after being contracted during the temporary stop. The small design is changing at high speed until the decorative design 55 is completely stopped regardless of whether or not the non-reach light emission effect is executed, and the main design is stopped in the same combination as the decorative design 55 is stopped. To do.

Next, with reference to FIG. 40, a specific example of the effect illustrated in FIG. 38(B) will be described. As in FIG. 39(B), FIG. 40(A) exemplifies the manner in which the start effect is started with the variable display of the special symbol. In this example, as indicated by the reserved number 52, the number of reservations in the first special symbol determination is 1 and the number of reservations in the second special symbol determination is 0. The number of reserved special symbol determination does not increase during the performance illustrated in the figure. FIG. 40(B) exemplifies a state in which the left symbol starts low-speed variation prior to the right symbol and the middle symbol among the decorative symbols 55 that have changed at high speed with the end of the start effect. FIG. 40C exemplifies how the non-reach mid-light emission effect corresponding to the left symbol is executed when the left symbol is displayed. In the example of FIG. 40(C), during the non-reach light emission effect for the left symbol, the character image 551 of the left symbol moves by the stop effect using the left symbol. At this time, the right symbol is changing slowly, and the middle symbol is changing rapidly. As illustrated in FIG. 40(D), the low-speed fluctuation of the right symbol continues until after the end-of-non-reach light emission effect for the left symbol ends (see FIG. 38(B)).

FIG. 40(E) exemplifies how the non-reach mid-light emission effect corresponding to the right symbol is executed when the right symbol is temporarily stopped. In the example of FIG. 40(E), during the non-reach light emission effect for the right symbol, the character image 551 of the right symbol moves by the stop effect using the right symbol. At this time, the left symbol is temporarily stopped and the middle symbol is changing at a low speed. FIG. 40F exemplifies how the non-reach medium emission effect corresponding to the middle symbol is executed when the middle symbol is temporarily stopped. In the example of FIG. 40(F), during the non-reach medium emission effect for the middle symbol, the character image 551 of the middle symbol moves by the stop effect using the middle symbol. At this time, all the decorative patterns 55 are temporarily stopped. In addition, the middle symbol is superposed on the front side of the left symbol and the right symbol in any of the high speed fluctuation, the low speed fluctuation, and the temporary stop. As illustrated in FIGS. 40(G) and 40(H), the decorative pattern 55 is fully stopped after being deflated during the temporary stop.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 41 to 43, the non-reach light emitting effect in the probability variation game state will be described. First, the execution timing of the non-reach medium light emission effect in the probability variation game state will be described with reference to FIG. 41. FIG. 41 is a time chart for explaining the execution timing of the non-reach light emission effect in the probability variation game state. FIG. 42 is an explanatory diagram for explaining an example of the non-reach light emission effect when the three decorative symbols 55 are temporarily stopped at the same time in the probability variation game state. FIG. 43 is an explanatory diagram for explaining an example of a non-reach mid-light emission effect when the three decorative symbols 55 are temporarily stopped in order in the probability variation game state.

FIG. 41(A) shows the movement of the decorative pattern 55 when the loss variation pattern HP4-2 is selected. In the present embodiment, when the loss variation pattern HP4-2 is selected, the effect pattern of the decorative symbol 55 in which the left symbol, the right symbol, and the middle symbol are temporarily stopped at the same time is selected with a probability of 100%.

As illustrated in FIG. 41(A), in the present embodiment, in the case of the probability variation game state, the start effect is executed along with the variable display of the special symbol in a mode different from the normal game state. The start effect in the probability variation game state is executed in a shorter execution time (for example, 0.2 seconds) than in the normal game state. For example, in the start effect in the probability variation game state, an action is performed such that the decorative pattern 55 jumps up (see FIG. 43(A)). At this time, unlike the case of the normal game state, the size and shape of the decorative pattern 55 do not change. With the end of the start effect, the decorative pattern 55 starts high-speed fluctuation (see FIG. 43(B)). In the case of the probability variation game state, the size and shape of the decorative pattern 55 may be changed depending on the start effect. In the case of the probability variation game state, the decorative pattern 55 may change at high speed in a mode in which it is difficult for the player to recognize that it is changing at high speed (for example, a mode that changes at high speed for 0.1 seconds). It does not have to change.

As illustrated in FIG. 41(A), when a predetermined time (for example, 0.8 seconds) elapses after the high speed fluctuation is started, the three decorative patterns 55 simultaneously change from the high speed fluctuation to the low speed fluctuation. The aspect (for example, shape and size) of the decorative pattern 55 during the high speed fluctuation and the low speed fluctuation is the same as that during the main stop. Note that, for example, the low speed fluctuation may be started in the order of the left design, the right design, and the middle design, or even if the middle design is delayed and the low speed fluctuation starts after the left design and the right design simultaneously start the low speed variation. Good.

As illustrated in FIG. 41(A), when a predetermined time (for example, 0.4 seconds) elapses after the decorative symbol 55 starts the low speed variation, the left symbol, the right symbol, and the middle symbol (both are in the low velocity fluctuation). ) Non-reach medium emission effect is executed. The non-reach light emitting effect in the probability variation gaming state is started during the low speed fluctuation of the decorative symbol 55 in a shorter execution time (0.4 seconds, for example) than in the normal gaming state. This suggests that the three decorative symbols 55 that are changing at low speed temporarily stop for a predetermined time (for example, 0.2 seconds) thereafter. The three decorative patterns 55 that are changing at a low speed are temporarily stopped at the same time in a lost manner of not reaching during the light emission effect during non-reach. Then, for example, after a lapse of a predetermined time (for example, 0.2 seconds) after the three decorative symbols 55 are temporarily stopped, the non-reach mid-light emission effect ends. When the loss variation pattern HP4-2 is selected, the decorative symbol 55 is permanently stopped with the stop display of the special symbol after a predetermined time (for example, 0.2 seconds) after the non-reach light emission effect is finished. In the present embodiment, unlike the normal game state, the stop effect is not executed in the probability variation game state.

FIG. 41(B) shows the movement of the decorative pattern 55 when the loss variation pattern HP4-1 or HP4-3 is selected. In the present embodiment, when the variation pattern is selected, the effect pattern of the decorative design 55 that is temporarily stopped in the order of the left design, the right design, and the middle design is selected with a probability of 100%.

As illustrated in FIG. 41B, when the loss variation pattern HP4-1 or 4-3 is selected, the left symbol, the right symbol, and the middle symbol are changed in order from the high speed variation to the low speed variation of HP4-2. Different from the case. For example, during the low speed fluctuation of the left symbol, the non-reach light emission effect for the left symbol is started at a predetermined execution time (for example, 0.4 seconds). At this time, the right symbol and the middle symbol are changing at high speed. At the end of the non-reach medium emission effect for the left symbol, the left symbol is temporarily stopped, the right symbol is changing slowly, and the middle symbol remains changing rapidly. After that, during the low speed fluctuation of the right symbol, the non-reach light emission effect for the right symbol is started at a predetermined execution time (for example, 0.4 seconds). At this time, the left symbol is temporarily stopped and the middle symbol remains at high speed. At the end of the non-reach medium emission effect for the right symbol, the left symbol and the right symbol are temporarily stopped, and the middle symbol is changing at a low speed. After that, during the low speed fluctuation of the medium symbol, the non-reach medium emission effect for the medium symbol is started at a predetermined execution time (for example, 0.4 seconds). At this time, the left symbol and the right symbol are temporarily stopped. At the end of the non-reach medium emission effect for the middle symbol, the left symbol and the right symbol are temporarily stopped, and the middle symbol is changing at a low speed. When the variation pattern HP4-1 or 4-3 is selected, the decoration is accompanied by the stop display of the special symbol after a predetermined time (for example, 0.2 seconds) after the non-reach medium emission effect for the medium symbol is finished. The design 55 is stopped.

Comparing FIG. 38 and FIG. 41, the temporary stop period of the decorative symbol 55 from the execution of the non-reach light emitting effect to the main stop is longer in the normal gaming state than in the probability variation gaming state. .. In the present embodiment, the temporary stop period of the decorative design 55 from the execution of the non-reach light emitting effect in the normal game state to the main stop is the decorative pattern 55 from the hit luminous effect being executed to the main stop. It is shorter than the temporary suspension period. The temporary stop period of the decorative pattern 55 from the execution of the non-reach light emission effect to the actual stop may be the same regardless of the game state, or in the normal game state than in the probability variation game state. May be shorter.

Next, a specific example of the effect illustrated in FIG. 41A will be described with reference to FIG. 42. FIG. 42(A) shows that when the number of holdings of the first special symbol determination is 0 and the number of holdings of the second special symbol determination is 3, the start effect is accompanied by the start of the variable display of the second special symbol. It illustrates how it is started. The small symbol 56 starts high-speed fluctuation with the start of the start effect. It should be noted that the number of reserved special symbols is not increased during the performance illustrated in the figure. As illustrated in FIG. 42(A), in the present embodiment, even if the start effect is started in the probability variation game state, the mode (for example, shape) of the decorative symbol 55 is different from that in the normal stop state unlike the case of the normal game state. Absent.

As illustrated in FIG. 42(C), in the probability variation game state, the decorative symbol 55 changes at high speed with the end of the start effect, as in the normal game state. After that, when the decorative pattern 55 fluctuates at a low speed, the non-reach medium emission effect for each of the three decorative patterns 55 is executed. As a result, as illustrated in FIGS. 42C and 42D, the three non-reach light emitting effect images 70 cause the three decorative patterns 55 to appear to shine. FIG. 42C exemplifies a state in which the non-reach during-light emission effect image 70 is superimposed and displayed on the decorative pattern 55 that is changing at a low speed and the non-reach-in-light emission effect sound is output from the speaker 24. Further, FIG. 43D exemplifies a state in which the non-reach light emission effect image 70 is superimposed and displayed on the temporarily stopped decorative pattern 55 and the non-reach light emission effect sound is output from the speaker 24. There is. In addition, FIG. 42(E) illustrates the state immediately after the end of the non-reach light emission effect. As illustrated in FIG. 42(F), the decorative symbol 55 is permanently stopped in the same manner as during the non-reach light emitting effect with the stop display of the second special symbol. The small design is changing at high speed until the decorative design 55 is completely stopped regardless of whether or not the non-reach light emission effect is executed, and the main design is stopped in the same combination as the decorative design 55 is stopped. To do.

Next, with reference to FIG. 43, a specific example of the effect illustrated in FIG. 41(B) will be described. Like FIG. 42(B), FIG. 43(A) exemplifies the manner in which the start effect is started along with the variable display of the special symbol. In this example, as indicated by the reserved number 52, the number of reservations in the first special symbol determination is 0, and the number of reservations in the second special symbol determination is 2. The number of reserved special symbol determination does not increase during the performance illustrated in the figure. FIG. 43(B) illustrates a state in which the decorative design 55 changes at high speed with the end of the start effect. In addition, FIG. 43C exemplifies how the non-reach medium emission effect is executed for the left symbol that started the low speed variation prior to the right symbol and the middle symbol. FIG. 43C exemplifies a state in which the reach tilt effect is executed after the non-reach light emission effect for the left symbol is finished. In the example of FIG. 43(C), an effect for reach-inspiring effect is displayed, which seems to extend rightward and leftward from the lower end of the right symbol, causing the right symbol to radiate almost as if friction occurs. FIG. 43(E) illustrates an example of the right symbol sliding along with the end of the reach fanching effect. FIG. 43(F) exemplifies the manner in which the non-reach light emitting effect is executed for the right symbol that is changing at a low speed and shows a number different from the left symbol. As a result, the player can recognize that the reach has been established. When the non-reach medium emission effect for the right symbol ends, as illustrated in FIGS. 43(G) and (H), the medium symbol non-reach medium emission effect during the low speed fluctuation of the medium symbol to the temporary stop. Is executed. As illustrated in FIGS. 43(I) and (J), after the decorative design 55 corresponding to the non-reach light emitting effect is temporarily stopped, the decorative design 55 is permanently stopped with the stop display of the second special design.

FIG. 44 is a table for explaining the total number of non-reach light emission effects for each variation pattern in the normal gaming state. As illustrated in FIG. 44, in the present embodiment, the non-reach medium-light emission effect is generated once for each decorative pattern in correspondence with the variation patterns (HP1 and HP3) corresponding to the simple loss in which the pseudo-relation cannot be executed. It is feasible. Corresponding to the variation pattern (HP2) corresponding to simple loss in which the pseudo-relation can be executed once, the non-reach light emission effect can be executed twice for each decorative symbol. In addition, in the variation pattern corresponding to the simple loss in which the pseudo-relation can be executed once, for example, three decorative symbols 55 are provisional as in the case of FIG. 39(A) to (G) or FIG. 40(A) to (G). After the stop, the pseudo-link is executed in the same flow as in FIG. Non-reach light emission effect is executed as each decorative pattern 55 is temporarily stopped in the first fluctuation and the first fluctuation.

In the present embodiment, not only when the reach effect is not executed during the variable display of the special symbol but also when the reach effect is executed, the non-reach light emitting effect can be executed regardless of the game state. When the reach effect is executed, during the period from the start of the reach pre-effect to the "reach notification", the non-reach light emission effect is generated in accordance with the temporary stop of the decorative pattern 55 as in the example of FIGS. 38 to 43. It is feasible. The “reach notification” in the present embodiment is an effect that outputs an effect sound from the speaker 24 in order to emphasize that the reach has been established. For example, in the reach notification, an effect sound (for example, a sound such as “reach”) that basically does not indicate the reliability of the jackpot is output from the speaker 24. When the reliability of the jackpot is high, an effect sound different from the effect sound (for example, effect sound of “chance”) may be output from the speaker 24 as the reach notification. In this embodiment, the reach notification can be executed regardless of the gaming state.

As illustrated in FIG. 44, in the present embodiment, a variation pattern in which pseudo-relation cannot be executed and reach effect can be executed (in the present embodiment, any (or all) of OP1 to 4 and RP1 to 4). Corresponding to, the left symbol and the right symbol can execute the non-reach light emission effect once each. On the other hand, the non-reach medium light emission effect corresponding to the middle symbol is 0 times (that is, not executable). For example, the non-reach medium light emission effect corresponding to the left symbol is executed during the pre-reach effect. The non-reach medium light emission effect corresponding to the right pattern is executed when the reach is established (immediately before the reach notification). In addition, the left symbol and the right symbol correspond to the variation pattern (any (or all) of OP1 to 4 and RP1 to 4 in this embodiment) capable of executing the pseudo-relation and the reach effect once. It is possible to execute the non-reach light emission effect twice each. For example, the non-reach medium emission effect is executed by the first fluctuation before the pseudo-repeating is executed and the first fluctuation again. On the other hand, the non-reach medium emission effect corresponding to the middle symbol is once, and is executed in the first variation. In addition, the left symbol and the right symbol correspond to the variation pattern (any (or all) of OP1 to 4 and RP1 to 4 in this embodiment) capable of executing the pseudo-relation and the reach effect twice. It is possible to execute the non-reach light emission effect three times each. For example, the non-reach medium emission effect is executed by the first fluctuation before the pseudo-repeating is executed and the first and second re-changes. On the other hand, the non-reach medium light emission effect corresponding to the middle symbol is twice, and is executed by the first fluctuation and the first fluctuation. In addition, in response to the variation pattern for jackpot that can execute the pseudo-repeating three times and the reach effect (any (or all) of OP1 to OP4 in the present embodiment), the non-reach medium emission effect is: This can be executed at the same timing as in the case of the variation pattern in which the pseudo-repeating and the reach effect can be executed twice. In the present embodiment, the jackpot is confirmed when the pseudo-repeating is executed three times. Therefore, in order to emphasize the third re-variation rather than the non-reach mid-light emission effect, a configuration is adopted in which the non-reach mid-light emission effect is not executed in the third re-variation.

FIG. 45 is a table for explaining the total number of times of non-reach light emission effect for each variation pattern in the probability variation game state. In this embodiment, the pseudo-relation is not executed in the probability variation game state. Therefore, the number of times of pseudo-run is zero in any variation pattern. As illustrated in FIG. 45, it is possible to execute the non-reach mid-light emission effect once for each decorative symbol in response to a variation pattern (HP4-2 in the present embodiment) corresponding to simple loss. In addition, the left symbol executes the non-reach mid-light emission effect once, corresponding to the variation pattern (OP5-1, OP5-2, OP6, and RP5 in this embodiment) capable of executing the reach effect (that is, the battle effect). It is possible. On the other hand, the non-reach mid-light emission effect corresponding to the right symbol and the middle symbol is 0 times (that is, not executable). In the probability variation gaming state, when the reach is established, the player has a higher expectation for the jackpot than in the normal gaming state. Therefore, in the present embodiment, in order to emphasize the reach establishment rather than the non-reach medium emission effect, a configuration is adopted in which the non-reach medium emission effect corresponding to the right symbol is not executed when the reach is established. In the probability variation game state as well, as in the case of the normal game state, the non-reach light emission effect corresponding to the right symbol may be executed before the reach notification.

Comparing FIG. 44 and FIG. 45, the left symbol can execute non-reach light emission effect regardless of the game state and the type of the variation pattern. Also, for the left symbol, regardless of the gaming state, the number of times that the medium symbol can execute the non-reach medium emission effect is smaller than that of the left symbol. About the right symbol is the same number of times as the left symbol in the normal game state, and is the same number of times as the middle symbol in the probability variation game state.

In addition, regardless of the game state, when the reach effect is executed, the non-reach light emission effect may not be executed. In the normal game state, the non-reach light emission effect can be executed when the reach effect is executed, and in the probability variation game state, the non-reach light emission is executed when the reach effect (that is, the battle effect) is executed. The performance may not be executable.

In the present embodiment, the proportion of the non-reach light emission effect executed for the decorative symbol 55 changing at a low speed during the normal game state is 0%. That is, the ratio of the scroll speed of the decorative pattern 55 being 0 (that is, temporarily stopped) at the start of the non-reach light emitting effect in the normal game state is higher than the ratio of being scrolled. In the stage A, the non-reach light emission effect may be executed for the temporarily stopped decorative pattern 55. In stage B, the non-reach light emission effect may be performed on the decorative pattern 55 that is changing at a low speed. With such a configuration, the ratio of the scroll speed of the decorative pattern 55 which is not 0 at the start of non-reach light emission effect in the normal game state can be set to 0% or more. In addition, in the probability variation game state, the non-reach light emission effect may be executed for the temporarily stopped decorative pattern 55.

In the normal mode, stage A may be capable of executing the non-reaching light emission effect, and stage B may not be capable of executing the non-reaching light emission effect. In the case of such a configuration, in the normal game state during the variation display of the special symbol, the non-reach light emitting effect can be executed with a probability of 50% (that is, the probability of being the stage A), while in the probability variation game state. A non-reach light emission effect can be executed with a probability of 100%.

In addition, when the loss variation pattern HP1 (or HP2) is selected, the effect control unit 130 receives one of the variation start commands and outputs one of those shown in (A) and (B) of FIG. 38. The effect pattern may be determined by random number lottery.

There may be an effect pattern in which the right symbol is temporarily stopped together with the left symbol, and then the middle symbol is temporarily stopped, or the right symbol and the middle symbol are temporarily stopped simultaneously after the left symbol is temporarily stopped. ..

Further, the background image for the non-reach medium emission effect may be superimposed and displayed on the front side of the normal background image with the start of the non-reach medium emission effect, so that the normal background image may appear to emit light. .. The background image for non-reach light emission effect may be erased with the start of the main stop of the special symbol immediately after (or immediately before the start), or may be erased at the start of the next variation. In the case of such a configuration, the non-reach mid-light emission effect image 70 may or may not be displayed on the front side of the decorative pattern 55 depending on the non-reach mid-light emission effect.

Note that the non-reach light emitting effect may be started while the decorative pattern 55 is not displayed. In this case, the decorative design 55 may be displayed (for example, temporarily stopped) by the end of this non-reach light emitting effect (or with the end), or the decorative pattern 55 after the non-reach light emitting effect is completed. May be displayed (for example, temporarily stopped).

In addition, when the decorative pattern 55 is not displayed, the non-reach light emission effect may be started along with displaying (for example, temporary stop) of the decorative pattern 55.

Note that, as a start effect, an effect (for example, a white image) such that the entire decorative pattern 55 looks shiny may be superimposed and displayed on the front side of each decorative pattern 55.

(Reach luminescence production)
Next, the reach light emission effect in the present embodiment will be described. The reach light emission effect is an effect that emphasizes that the reach has been established. In the present embodiment, regardless of the game state, the reach light emission effect is performed when the decorative pattern 55 is displayed (temporarily stopped) in the reach state. That is, the reach light emission effect can be executed when the decorative symbol 55 is displayed in a mode that does not notify that the jackpot is a big hit. The reach light emission effect can be executed regardless of whether the change pattern allows the reach effect to be executed. In this respect, in the case of a jackpot variation pattern, it differs from the hit light emission effect that can be executed when the decorative pattern 55 is displayed in a manner of notifying that it is a jackpot.

The reach light emission effect in the present embodiment has a first reach symbol light emission effect, a second reach symbol light emission effect, and a reach line effect. The first reach symbol light emission effect is, for example, when displaying the reachable decorative pattern 55 (specifically, the timing according to the reach establishment), the effect image 80 in which the left symbol and the right symbol appear to emit light. It is an effect to be displayed (see FIGS. 48(C) to (G)). In the first reach symbol light emission effect, for example, the effect images 80 are simultaneously displayed one by one on the left symbol and the right symbol in an overlapping manner on the front side of the decorative symbol 55. In this embodiment, the left and right symbols are simultaneously emitted in the same light emission mode by the first reach symbol light emission effect. It should be noted that, along with the display of the effect image 80, an effect sound (for example, a sound effect called “Kahn”) may be output from the speaker 24. The first reach symbol light emission effect is executed with a longer execution time than the reach notification, for example, with the start of the reach notification. The first reach symbol light emission effect is an effect that does not suggest the reliability of the jackpot.

In the present embodiment, the first reach symbol light emission effect is an effect that can be executed regardless of the game state. The first reach symbol light emission effect in the probability variation gaming state is executed while the middle symbol is not displayed (see FIG. 53(C)). On the other hand, the first reach symbol light emission effect in the normal game state is executed while the middle symbol is displayed (see FIGS. 48(C) to (G)). However, the first reach symbol light emission effect is not executed for the middle symbol (that is, the middle symbol does not appear to be emitting light). The effect image 80 may be different or the same depending on the game state. As the effect image 80, one image extending over the left symbol and the right symbol may be displayed. Note that the effect image 80 may be displayed once during one first reach pattern light emission effect, or may be intermittently displayed a plurality of times (the same image or different images may be displayed). Further, regardless of the game state, the first reach symbol light emission effect may be executed during the display of the middle symbol.

In the present embodiment, the board lamp 25 and/or the frame lamp 37 emit light in the light emission pattern for the first reach symbol light emission effect during the first reach symbol light emission effect. The light emission pattern for the first reach symbol light emission effect is different from the light emission patterns for other effects. Therefore, it is possible to recognize that the first reach symbol light emission effect is being executed from the effect means other than the liquid crystal screen 5. In other words, the liquid crystal screen 5 and the panel lamp 25 and/or the frame lamp 37 correspond to (operate with) the first reach symbol light emission effect. In addition, you may use the color which shows the high or low of reliability for the light emission pattern for 1st reach symbol light emission production. The light emission pattern in this case may be determined by random number lottery based on the result of the special symbol determination by the effect control unit 130, may be uniquely determined according to the type of reach effect, or may form a reach. It may be uniquely determined according to the type of the decorative pattern 55.

The second reach symbol light emission effect is, for example, when displaying the reachable decorative pattern 55 in the normal game state, an effect image 82 in which the left symbol and the right symbol appear to emit light is displayed (FIG. 49). (See (L)). In the second reach symbol light emission effect, for example, one effect image 82 is simultaneously displayed on the left symbol and the right symbol at the front side of the decorative symbol 55 in a superimposed manner. In the present embodiment, the left and right symbols are simultaneously emitted in the same light emission mode by the second reach symbol light emission effect. It should be noted that, along with the display of the effect image 82, an effect sound (for example, a sound effect of “Shun”) may be output from the speaker 24. The second reach symbol light emission effect is executed in a shorter execution time than the first reach symbol light emission effect, for example. Unlike the first reach symbol light emission effect, the second reach symbol light emission effect can be executed when a predetermined time has elapsed since the reach was established (in the present embodiment, during SP development effect or during SPSP development effect). It should be noted that during the SP development performance and during the SPSP development performance, both are one of the reach performances that are expected to be a big hit. The second reach symbol light emission effect is an effect that is executed while the middle symbol is not displayed, and the second reach symbol light emission effect is not executed for the middle symbol (that is, the middle symbol seems to emit light). Invisible). The second reach symbol light emission effect is an effect that does not suggest the reliability of the jackpot. In the present embodiment, the second reach symbol light emission effect cannot be executed in the probability variation game state.

In the present embodiment, during the second reach pattern light emitting effect, the board lamp 25 and/or the frame are formed by the light emission pattern for the SP development effect (or the SPSP development effect) (for example, the light emission pattern corresponding to (interlocking with) the BGM being output). The lamp 37 emits light. The gaming machine 1 in the present embodiment does not include a light emitting pattern for the second reach symbol light emitting effect. Therefore, it is impossible to recognize that the second reach symbol light emission effect is being performed from the effect means other than the liquid crystal screen 5. That is, with respect to the second reach symbol light emission effect, the liquid crystal screen 5 does not correspond to the panel lamp 25 and/or the frame lamp 37 (not linked).

Reach line production, for example, when displaying the decorative design 55 in the reach established state in the normal game state (in the present embodiment, at the same time as the first reach design light emission production), the left design and the right design appear to emit light. This is an effect of displaying the reach line image 81 (see FIGS. 48(C) to (F)). Since the middle symbol in the reach line effect is changing at a high speed (or low speed), the middle pattern does not appear to be emitting light even when the reach line effect is executed. The reach line effect is started, for example, with the start of the reach notification (and the first reach symbol light emission effect), and is ended with the end of the reach notification. Then, after the end of the reach line effect, the first reach symbol light emission effect ends. As described above, in the present embodiment, the display time during which the reach line image 81 is displayed by the reach line effect is the same as the time when the effect sound related to the reach notification is output from the speaker 24. Further, in the present embodiment, the display time of the reach line image 81 is shorter than the display time of the effect image 80 related to the first reach symbol light emission effect. The reach line image 81 may be displayed for the same period as the effect image 80. Further, the reach line effect may be executed after the end of the first reach symbol light emission effect (for example, after 1 second). In this case, the reach notification may be started with the start of the first reach symbol light emission effect, or may be started with the start of the reach line effect. In addition, even in the probability variation game state, the reach line effect may be executed according to the reach establishment (for example, along with the first reach symbol light emission effect).

In the reach line effect in the present embodiment, a default reach line image 81, which basically does not suggest the reliability of the jackpot, is superimposed and displayed on the front side of the decorative pattern 55 across the left symbol and the right symbol. When the reliability of the jackpot is high, an image including the characters “chance” is displayed as the reach line image 81. The reach line image 81 is an image that suggests that the reach line image 81 has higher reliability than the default reach line image 81, and the reach sound (for example, a sound of “chance”) output from the speaker 24 in response to the reach notification. Represent the same content. In this embodiment, the reach line effect can be executed in the normal gaming state (that is, it cannot be executed in the probability variation gaming state). The reach line effect may be executed in the case of the probability variation game state. It should be noted that the reach line image 81 may use a color that indicates high or low reliability.

In the present embodiment, the board lamp 25 and/or the frame lamp 37 emit light in the light emission pattern for the reach line effect during the reach line effect. The light emission pattern for reach line production is different from the light emission patterns for other productions. Further, the light emission pattern for the reach line effect is, for example, a light emission pattern which can be simultaneously output in a manner distinguishable from the light emission pattern for the first reach symbol light effect. Therefore, it is possible to recognize that the reach line effect is being executed from the effect means other than the liquid crystal screen 5. That is, for the reach line effect, the liquid crystal screen 5 and the panel lamp 25 and/or the frame lamp 37 correspond (interlock). As an example, the light emission pattern for reach line effect 81 makes the extension lines on the left and right ends of the reach line image 81 appear to shine in the same color as the reach line image 81, and the other portions are light emission patterns for the first reach pattern light emission effect. It may emit light. In addition, you may use the color which shows the high or low of reliability for the light emission pattern for reach line productions. The light emission pattern in this case may be uniquely determined according to the type of the reach line image 81, or by random number lottery based on the result of the special symbol determination by the effect control unit 130 regardless of the type of the reach line image 81. May be decided. Further, it may be uniquely determined according to the type of reach effect, or may be uniquely determined according to the type of the decorative pattern 55 forming the reach.

The effect image 80, the effect image 82, and the reach line image 81 are different images. These images 80 to 82 are displayed only in the reach light emission effect. The effect image 80 is, for example, an image larger than the decorative pattern 55 of the size “medium”, and is an image in which the central part of the decorative pattern 55 appears white and the peripheral part appears yellow (FIG. 48( (See C) to (G)). The effect image 82 is smaller than the effect image 80, and is a white image that diagonally crosses the decorative pattern 55 (see FIG. 48(L)). The reach line image 81 is a horizontally long image that is smaller than the effect image 80 and larger than the effect image 82 (see FIGS. 48C to 48F). The images 80 to 82 are displayed in the same manner on both the left symbol and the right symbol. Therefore, the visibility when these images are displayed is the same for the left symbol and the right symbol. Further, the images 80 to 82 are images smaller than the effect images 60 to 64 related to the winning light emission effect. The effect image 62 may be displayed in a reduced size as the effect image 82. The modes of the images 80 to 82 may be changed according to the type of the decorative pattern 55. For example, the "7" symbol may display images 80 to 82 different from those of the other decorative symbols 55.

In the present embodiment, for example, the execution time of the reach light emission effect itself (that is, the total execution time of the first reach symbol light emission effect and the second reach symbol light emission effect) is more probable than in the normal game state. It is shorter when in a state. For example, the execution time in the normal game state is 3 seconds, and the execution time in the probability variation game state is 1 second. The execution time of the reach light emission effect may be longer or the same in the probability variation game state than in the normal game state.

In the present embodiment, the execution time of the reach light emission effect is shorter than the execution time of the hit light emission effect in any game state. Depending on the game state (or in any game state), the execution time of the hit light emission effect may be longer or the same as the execution time of the reach light emission effect.

In the present embodiment, as described above, the reach effect can be executed when the variation time of the special symbol is relatively long. Here, the expectation is 30 to 50% even in the high-reliability SPSP reach production. Therefore, even if the reach effect is executed, the proportion of jackpots as a whole is less than half. Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the variation time is long, the appearance ratio of the reach light emission effect is higher than the appearance ratio of the hit light emission effect.

The reach light emission effect may be started while the decorative pattern 55 is not displayed. In this case, the reachable decorative pattern 55 may be displayed (for example, temporarily stopped) by the end of the reach light emission effect (or with the end), or the decorative pattern 55 may be displayed after the reach light effect is completed. It may be displayed (for example, temporarily stopped).

In addition, when the decorative pattern 55 is not displayed, the reach light emission effect may be started along with displaying (for example, temporarily stopping) the decorative pattern 55.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 46 to 51, the reach light emission effect in the normal game state will be described. First, with reference to FIG. 46 and FIG. 47, the execution timing of the reach light emission effect in the normal game state will be described. FIG. 46 is a time chart for explaining the execution timing of the first reach symbol light emission effect in the normal game state. FIG. 47 is a time chart for explaining the execution timing of the first reach symbol light emission effect and the second reach symbol light emission effect in the normal game state.

In the example illustrated in FIG. 46, the first reach pattern light emission effect and the reach line effect are executed as the reach light emission effect, and the second reach symbol light emission effect is not executed. In the example illustrated in FIG. 47, the first reach symbol light emission effect, the reach line effect, and the second reach symbol light emission effect are executed as the reach light emission effects. As described above, in the present embodiment, the reach line effect is executed at the same timing as the reach notification. Therefore, in FIG. 46 and FIG. 47, the reach line effect is not shown. Note that the flow of the effect during the hit notification and the loss notification has been described with reference to FIGS. 22 to 32, and thus the description thereof will be omitted in FIGS. 46 and 47.

In FIG. 46(A), during the reach production in the case where the variation pattern in which the winning is notified in the N reach production (that is, the N reach production does not develop into the SP reach production, the SPSP reach production, or the special production) is selected. The flow of the production of is described. In response to such a variation pattern, as illustrated in FIG. 46(A), the first reach symbol light emission effect can be executed, but the second reach symbol light emission effect cannot be executed. In the present embodiment, the N reach effect is started during the reach notification and during the first reach symbol light emission effect. The N reach effect may be started when the reach is established, or may be started when the first reach symbol light emission effect is started (or ended). Further, the first reach symbol light emission effect may be executed when the reach is established.

In FIG. 46(B), a variation pattern is selected in which the N reach effect is not executed and the winning is notified by the SP reach effect (that is, the SP reach effect does not develop into the SPSP reach effect or the special effect). The flow of the production during the reach production in the case of being shown is described. In response to such a variation pattern, as shown in FIG. 46(B), the first reach symbol light emission effect can be executed according to the reach establishment, but the second reach symbol light emission effect cannot be executed. Is. In the present embodiment, during the first reach symbol light emission effect, the SP development effect is started with the end of the reach notification. In addition, the SP development effect ends after the first reach symbol light emission effect ends, and the SP reach effect starts accordingly.

FIG. 46C shows the flow of the effect during the reach effect when the N reach effect and/or the SP reach effect is not executed and the variation pattern in which the winning is notified is selected in the SPSP reach effect. Has been done. In response to such a variation pattern, as illustrated in FIG. 46(C), the first reach symbol light emission effect can be executed according to the reach establishment, but the second reach symbol light emission effect cannot be executed. Is. In the present embodiment, during the first reach symbol light emission effect, the SPSP development effect is started with the end of the reach notification. Further, the SPSP development effect is ended after the end of the first reach symbol light emission effect, and the SPSP reach effect is started accordingly.

In FIG. 46(D), the flow of the production during the reach production in the case where the N reach production is not executed and the variation pattern in which the SP reach production is developed to the SPSP reach production and the winning is notified is selected is shown. It is written. In response to such a variation pattern, as illustrated in FIG. 46(D), the first reach symbol light emission effect can be executed, but the second reach symbol light emission effect cannot be executed. In the present embodiment, during the SPSP development effect when the SP reach effect is developed into the SPSP reach effect, the second reach symbol light emission effect is not executed in order to create a sense of unity between the SP reach effect and the SPSP reach effect. In the present embodiment, when the N-reach effect having a lower reliability than the SP-reach effect is developed to the SPSP reach effect, the reach effects do not have a sense of unity. For this reason, in order to emphasize that the SPSP reach develops when the N reach production develops to the SPSP reach production, the second reach pattern light emission production can be executed during the SPSP development production (FIG. 47(C)). reference). In the present embodiment, the first reach symbol light emission effect is executed at the same timing as in the case of responding to a variation pattern in which a win is notified in the SP reach effect (that is, it does not develop into the SPSP reach effect) (FIG. 46 ( See B)).

FIG. 47(A) shows a case where a variation pattern is selected in which the N-reach effect is developed to the SP-reach effect and the winning is notified (that is, the SP-reach effect is not developed to the SPSP reach effect or the special effect). The flow of production during reach production is shown. In response to such a variation pattern, as illustrated in FIG. 47A, the first reach symbol light emission effect is executed according to the reach establishment. The second reach pattern light emission effect is started, for example, in the final stage of the SP development effect and ends by the end of the SP development effect. The second reach symbol light emission effect may be started with the start of the SP development effect, or may be ended with the end of the SP development effect.

FIG. 47(B) shows the flow of the effect when the variation pattern in which the N reach effect is developed to the SP reach effect and further to the special effect to notify the winning/winning is selected. Further, FIG. 47(D) shows the flow of the effect when the variation pattern that is developed from the N reach effect to the SP reach effect and further to the SPSP reach effect and the winning pattern is notified is selected. .. In response to these fluctuation patterns, as illustrated in FIGS. 47(B) and (D), the first reach symbol light emission effect and the second reach symbol light emission effect are executed at the same timing as in FIG. 47(A). To be done. In the case of FIG. 47(D), as in the case of FIG. 46(D), the second reach symbol light emission effect is not executed during the SPSP development effect when the SP reach effect is expanded to the SPSP reach effect. This creates a sense of unity between the SP reach production and the SP reach production.

In FIG. 47C, the flow of the effect when the variation pattern in which the N-reach effect is developed to the SPSP reach effect and the winning is notified is selected is shown. In response to such a variation pattern, as illustrated in FIG. 47(C), the first reach symbol light emission effect is executed at the same timing as in FIG. 47(A). The second reach pattern light emission effect is started, for example, during the SPSP development effect, and ends before the SPSP development effect ends. The second reach symbol light emission effect may be started with the start of the SPSP development effect, or may be ended with the end of the SPSP development effect.

In the present embodiment, the second reach symbol light emission effect can be executed regardless of whether the N reach effect is expanded to the SP reach effect or the SPSP reach effect (see FIG. 47). In addition, the second reach symbol light emission effect cannot be executed when the SP reach effect is developed into any of the special effect and the SPSP reach effect.

The second reach symbol light emission effect may be started with the start of the SP development effect, or the second reach symbol light emission effect may be started with the end of the SP development effect. Moreover, you may perform 2nd reach symbol light emission production during SP reach production or during SPSP reach production. Further, the second reach symbol light emission effect may be executed during the SPSP development effect when the SP reach effect is expanded to the SPSP reach effect.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 48 to 51, an example of the reach light emission effect in the normal game state will be described. FIG. 48 is an explanatory diagram for explaining an example of the reach light emission effect in the normal game state. FIG. 49 is an explanatory diagram for describing an example of the reach symbol light emission effect in the normal game state. 50 and 51 are explanatory diagrams for explaining an example of the flow after the end of the second reach symbol light emission effect in the normal game state.

As illustrated in FIGS. 48A and 48B, in this example, the reach is established with the "1" symbol. It should be noted that FIG. 48(A) exemplifies a state when the non-reach medium light emission effect due to the temporary stop of the left symbol is finished. Further, FIG. 48(B) illustrates a state in which the reach is established by the temporary stop of the right symbol, and the non-reach light emission effect due to the temporary stop of the right symbol is finished.

As illustrated in FIG. 48C, for example, when a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds) elapses after the non-reach medium light emission effect for the right symbol ends, the first reach symbol light emission effect and the reach line. Production and reach notification are started. FIG. 48C exemplifies a state in which the entire left symbol and right symbol (both with characters) are illuminated by the effect image 80 relating to the first reach symbol light emission effect. In addition, the effect sound related to the reach notification (for example, the “cha” part of the voice of “chance”) is output from the speaker 24. Along with this, the reach line image 81 is superimposed and displayed on the front side of the effect image 80 from the middle of the left symbol to the middle of the right symbol. As illustrated in FIG. 48C, the effect image 80 is larger than the reach line image 81 at the start of the reach light emission effect. In this example, as the reach line image 81, for example, characters such as “chance” are slightly floating. Reach notification and reach line production suggest high reliability. In the example of FIG. 48(C), the middle symbol and the small symbol 56 continue to change at high speed. The image related to the reach light emission effect is displayed on the front side of the middle symbol and on the back side of the small symbol 56. It should be noted that the small symbol 56 may be displayed in the same reach mode as the decorative symbol 55 with the reach establishment.

FIG. 48(D) illustrates the state immediately after FIG. 48(C). As illustrated in FIG. 48(D), the left symbol and the right symbol are continuously illuminated by the effect image 80. Further, a moving image in which the reach line image 81 extends to the front side of the effect image 80 from the left end of the screen (or the left end of the left symbol) to the right end of the screen (or the right end of the right symbol) is displayed. In this example, the letters “chance” are clearly displayed as the reach line image 81. In addition, the effect sound related to the reach notification (for example, the “sense” portion of the sound “chance”) is output from the speaker 24. The reach notification is ended by the output of the effect sound.

In the example of FIG. 48(D), the low speed fluctuation of the middle symbol is started by the N reach effect being started. In this example, the middle symbol keeps changing at a low speed until after the end of the first reach symbol light emission effect. The middle symbol in the first reach symbol light emission effect is superimposed and displayed behind the effect image 80 and the reach line image 81. Therefore, the image is hidden by these images and a part of the image cannot be seen. Although the effect image 80 and the reach line image 81 are on the middle pattern, it does not appear that the middle pattern is emitting light. In addition, the middle symbol may be superimposed and displayed on the front side of the effect image 80 and the reach line image 81 during the first reach symbol light emission effect.

In the present embodiment, as illustrated in FIGS. 48(D) to (G), the medium symbol in the first reach symbol light emission effect is when the first reach symbol light emission effect is not executed (for example, during N reach effect). ) Is a different mode. Specifically, for example, it may be a dark appearance or a low contrast. In addition, it is not necessary to change the mode of the middle symbol during the first reach symbol light emission effect.

FIG. 48(E) illustrates the state immediately after FIG. 48(D). As illustrated in FIG. 48(E), the left symbol and the right symbol are continuously illuminated by the effect image 80. Further, as the reach line image 81 extending from the left end of the screen (or the left end of the left symbol) to the right end of the screen (or the right end of the right symbol), a thin and small moving image is displayed so that the light is focused. In this example, the characters “chance” included in the reach line image 81 have already been deleted. Therefore, by reducing the reach line image 81, the reach line image 81 changes from a mode that suggests the reliability of the jackpot to a mode that does not suggest it.

FIG. 48(F) illustrates the state immediately after FIG. 48(E). As illustrated in FIG. 48(F), although the effect image 80 is displayed in a superimposed manner on the left symbol and the right symbol, the character image 552 of the left symbol and the right symbol is beginning to appear to be slightly transparent. .. In addition, the numerical image 552 of the left symbol and the right symbol is superimposed and displayed on the front side of the effect image 80. As a result, it is possible to recognize which decorative pattern 55 has reached the reach during the first reach pattern light emission effect. In the example of FIG. 48(F), as the reach line image 81, a moving image further narrowed so that the light from the left edge of the screen (or the left edge of the left symbol) to the right edge of the screen (or the right edge of the right symbol) is focused is displayed. It The reach line image 81 is focused and erased as it is during the first reach symbol light emission effect. This ends the reach line effect.

FIG. 48(G) illustrates the state immediately after FIG. 48(F). As illustrated in FIG. 48(G), the character image 552 of the left symbol and the right symbol is more transparent than in the case of FIG. 48(F). The number image 552 of the left symbol and the right symbol is continuously displayed in a superposed manner on the front side of the effect image 80. The display positions of these decorative symbols 55 are moved so that the space between the left symbol and the right symbol is widened. Immediately after such a state, the effect image 80 is erased so as to pop. As a result, the first reach symbol light emission effect ends. When the first reach symbol light emission effect ends, it becomes possible to see that the middle symbol is changing at a lower speed on the front side than the left symbol and the right symbol (see FIG. 48(H)). It should be noted that the interval between the left symbol and the right symbol may be increased with the start of the first reach symbol light emission effect (or reach line effect), or the end of the first reach symbol light emission effect (or reach line effect). May be accompanied by.

FIG. 48(H) illustrates the state immediately after FIG. 48(G). As illustrated in FIG. 48(H), with the end of the first reach pattern light emission effect, the character itself is the same, but a character image 552 of a different mode from before the start to the end of the first reach pattern light emission effect is predetermined. Is displayed for 1 second. When this display time elapses, as illustrated in FIG. 48(I), the character image 552 returns to the same mode as before the start of the first reach symbol light emission effect (for example, refer to FIG. 48(B)). The change in the character image 552 further emphasizes that the reach is established. The character image 552 may not be changed with the end of the first reach symbol light emission effect.

48(I), in the case of a variation pattern in which a big hit is notified in the N reach effect (that is, in the case of corresponding to the variation pattern OP1), for example, effects after the symbol-matching effect in "1" symbol matching are executed. The hit notification is given. Since the specific example of the hit notification has been described above, the description thereof is omitted here. In the case of a variation pattern in which a loss notification is made in the N reach effect, a temporary stop is made at the reach loss eye, and then the main stop is performed (see FIGS. 51(a) and 51(b)). While the reach lost eyes are displayed, none of the non-reach light emission effect, the reach light emission effect, the hit light emission effect, and the chance eye light emission effect are executed. In the case of a variation pattern that develops from N reach production to SP reach production (or SPSP reach production), the middle symbol starts high-speed variation as illustrated in FIG. 49(J).

49(J), in the case of a variation pattern that develops from N reach production to SP reach production, the middle symbol is hidden and the SP development production is started as illustrated in FIG. 49(K). It When the SP development effect starts, the decorative pattern 55 changes from the character-present mode to the character-less form. As illustrated in FIG. 49(L), for example, the second reach pattern light emission effect is executed at the end of this SP development effect. FIG. 49(L) exemplifies how the left image and the right symbol (both without characters) blink from the upper left to the lower right by the effect image 82 related to the second reach symbol light emission effect. In the present embodiment, the left symbol and the right symbol move to the upper left and right ends of the liquid crystal screen 5 during the SP development effect. For example, during the second reach symbol light emission effect, it is executed when the movement of the left symbol and the right symbol is completed. In the example of FIG. 49(K), the middle symbol and the small symbol 56 continue to change at high speed. It should be noted that during the second reach symbol light emitting effect, the small symbol 56 may be displayed in the same reach mode as the decorative symbol 55.

As illustrated in FIG. 49(M), when the SP development effect ends after the second reach symbol light emission effect ends, the SP reach effect starts. For example, during the SP reach production, as shown in FIG. 49(O), a chance increase suggesting high reliability may be executed. In this example, when the chance up is not executed, the character A closes his eyes and mouth (default mode of SP reach effect, see FIG. 49(N)). When the chance up is executed, the character A opens his eyes and mouth (see FIG. 49(O)). It should be noted that even if this chance up is executed, it may be lost (when the chance up is executed, it may be a big hit). The gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment does not have the light emission pattern for increasing the chance, and the board lamp 25 and the frame lamp 37 emit light in the default light emitting pattern even when the opportunity is increased. For this reason, it is impossible to recognize that the chance up is being performed from the rendering means other than the liquid crystal screen 5. In other words, the liquid crystal screen 5 and the panel lamp 25 and/or the frame lamp 37 do not correspond to each other (they are not interlocked) with each other for increasing the chance.

As illustrated in FIG. 49(P), thereafter, in the middle of the SP reach effect, an effect image imitating the effect button 26 is combined such that the effect images are combined in the left-right direction and the downward direction. This effect is an effect that is executed immediately before the operation promotion effect, and is an effect that fuels the execution of the operation promotion effect. Then, as illustrated in FIG. 50(Q), the operation promotion effect is executed. This operation promotion effect may be the same as or different from the operation promotion effect during the decided effect. At the start of the effective period, an image simulating the effect button 26 in detail and a white effect image superimposed and displayed on the front side of this image may be displayed as the operation promotion image 65. For example, with this effect image, an image that imitates the effect button 26 in detail appears to shine. Then, when this effect image is erased after a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds), an image in which the effect button 26 is imitated in detail may be clearly seen. In the operation promotion effect, the operation button 26 may be displayed as a detailed image by alternately switching the operation-free image and the operation-enabled image at the same position from the start to the end of the effective period. .. The no-operation image is an effect image that imitates the effect button 26 that is not operated. The operated image is an image simulating the effect button 26 in the operated state (that is, the pressed state). By alternately displaying the image in the non-operated state and the image in the operated state, the manner in which the effect button 26 is operated is represented, and the player is urged to perform the button operation.

In the present embodiment, a cut-in image that indicates reliability is displayed for a predetermined time (for example, 2 seconds) according to an operation (or according to the end of a predetermined effective period). There is a case where it is superimposed and displayed on the image to destroy the decorative pattern 55) and a case where the design matching effect is executed (see FIGS. 50(S) and (T)). When a cut-in image (for example, an image displayed as “I can't lose!” displayed at the right end of FIG. 50(S)) is displayed, the SP reach effect is executed until the end. On the other hand, when the symbol matching effect is executed, the SP reach effect is not executed until the final stage, and the hit notification is given during the SP reach effect. The details of the winning notification are omitted because they have been described above. In addition, during the production related to the operation promotion production including the production of the slanting production and the production of the cut-in image, the panel lamp 25 is set to the emission patterns for these productions (that is, the emission patterns different from the emission patterns for other productions). And/or the frame lamp 37 emits light. Therefore, this point is different from the chance increase in that the liquid crystal screen 5 and the panel lamp 25 and/or the frame lamp 37 do not correspond (are not linked).

As illustrated in FIG. 50(U), thereafter, at the end of the SP reach effect, an effect image in which something happens is displayed in the center of the liquid crystal screen 5. This effect is an effect that is executed only immediately before the decided effect, and is an effect that fuels the execution of the decided effect. Then, as illustrated in FIG. 50(V), a final effect is executed. This decided effect may be the same mode as the operation promotion effect in the middle stage of the SP reach effect, or may be executed in a different mode (for example, a mode illustrated in FIGS. 50(V) and (W)) in the case of high reliability. May be. At the start of the effective period, an image simulating the effect button 26 in detail and a white effect image superimposed and displayed on the front side of this image may be displayed as the operation promotion image 65. For example, with this effect image, an image that imitates the effect button 26 in detail appears to shine. Then, when this effect image is erased after a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds), an image in which the effect button 26 is imitated in detail may be clearly seen.

In the case of a variation pattern in which a big hit is notified in the SP reach effect, for example, in accordance with an operation (or according to the end of a predetermined effective period), for example, effects after the symbol-matching effect with “1” symbol-matching are executed. The hit notification is given. Since the specific example of the hit notification has been described above, the description thereof is omitted here. In the case of a variation pattern in which a loss notification or a winning notification is given in the SP reach production, and in the case of a variation pattern that develops from the SP reach production to the SPSP reach production or a special production, the decorative pattern 55 temporarily stops at the reach lost eye (FIG. 50 (X ) And FIG. 51(Y)). At this point in time, it is not yet decided that the decorative pattern 55 is actually stopped in the lost form (that is, the temporary loss). In the positioning of the size in FIG. 18, the middle pattern during the temporary stop of the reach lose eye is smaller than “large” but larger “middle” to “middle” which is almost the same size as during the reach pre-production. The size changes.

In the present embodiment, the non-reach light emission effect is not executed in the case of the notification of the loss by the reach loss eye. In this respect, it is different from the case where the non-reach light emission effect can be executed when the reach is not established even with the same notification of loss. Further, in the present embodiment, the reach light emission effect, the hit light emission effect, and the chance eye light emission effect are not executed while the reach lost eyes are displayed.

In the case of a variation pattern for notifying a loss or a hit without developing SPSP reach effects or special effects, model name display as illustrated in FIG. 51(Z) subsequent to FIG. 51(Y) indicates a predetermined execution time (for example, 2 seconds). The model name display is, for example, an effect in which the liquid crystal screen 5 is darkened and the characters “butt sumo”, which is the model name of the gaming machine 1 in the present embodiment, are displayed. In the present embodiment, basically, after the model name is displayed, the loss is notified. Therefore, basically (specifically, for example, in the case of a variation pattern for notifying a loss without developing SPSP reach effect or special effect), the normal background image is returned and the same reach loss immediately before the model name is displayed. With the combination of eyes, the decorative pattern 55 with characters temporarily stops after the temporary stop (flow of FIG. 51 (Z)→(B)→(B)). While the reach lost eyes are displayed, none of the non-reach light emission effect, the reach light emission effect, the hit light emission effect, and the chance eye light emission effect are executed.

At some rate (for example, about 30% of the jackpots that are announced in the SP reach production), the model name display ends after a predetermined time (for example, one second) from the execution of the model name display, and the jackpot hits. Be informed. In this case, for example, following the display of the model name, a notification of the fact that effects after the symbol-matching effect in "1" symbol matching (or "7" symbol matching instead of "1" symbol matching) is executed is performed is performed. .. Since the specific example of the hit notification has been described above, the description thereof is omitted here.

In the case of a variation pattern that develops into a special effect, the effect after FIG. 31(C) is executed following FIG. 51(Y) (the explanation here is omitted). In the case of the variation pattern that develops into SPSP reach production, SPSP development production as illustrated in FIG. 51D is executed subsequent to FIG. 51Y. In the case of such a flow, the second reach symbol light emission effect is not executed during the SPSP development effect. In the SPSP reach production that follows the SPSP development production, for example, as shown in FIG. 51(e), a state in which the character plays a bottom wrestling match is displayed. Then, the final production may be executed in the final stage (see FIG. 51F). The mode of the decided effect may be the same mode as the operation promotion effect of the middle stage of the SP reach effect, or in the case of the high reliability or the mode in which the image imitating the protruding effect button 26 in detail is displayed regardless of the reliability. ..

In the case of a variation pattern in which a loss is notified in the SPSP reach effect, the decorative pattern 55 is temporarily stopped by a reach loss eye according to an operation (or according to the end of a predetermined effective period) (see FIG. 51(g)). In the positioning of the size in FIG. 18, the middle symbol during the tentative stop in the reach loser eye is “medium” having almost the same size as during the pre-reach effect. In the case of a loss, after the model name is displayed following FIG. 51(g), the decorative pattern 55 that has changed to the character presence mode is stopped and the loss is confirmed (FIG. 51(Z), (a), And (b)). While the reach lost eyes are displayed, none of the non-reach light emission effect, the reach light emission effect, the hit light emission effect, and the chance eye light emission effect are executed.

On the other hand, in the case of the variation pattern that gives a hit notification in the SPSP reach effect, in accordance with the operation (or according to the end of the predetermined effective period), for example, the effect after the symbol-matching effect with “1” symbol-matching is executed. The hit notification is given. Incidentally, in the case of the variation pattern in which the hit notification is given in the SPSP reach effect, the model name is displayed following (to) and (to) of FIG. 51, as in the case of the loss (that is, the hit light emission effect is not executed). There is also a case where a hit notification is performed after the effect after the symbol-matching effect is executed (the flow of FIG. 51 (g) → (Z) → (c)). Since the specific example of the hit notification has been described above, the description thereof is omitted here. If the model name is displayed after the SPSP reach effect, it may be lost. That is, the model name display may be an effect that suggests that the player may lose the game when executed after the SP reach production, and suggests that the player may lose the game when executed after the SP reach production.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 52 to 54, the reach light emission effect in the probability variation gaming state will be described. First, with reference to FIG. 52, the execution timing of the reach light emission effect in the probability variation game state will be described. In the present embodiment, as illustrated in FIG. 52, the first reach symbol light emission effect is executed as the reach light emission effect, and the second reach symbol light emission effect and the reach line effect are not executed. The first reach symbol light emission effect is executed according to the reach establishment as in the case of the normal game state. Further, the reach notification is executed along with the start of the first reach symbol light emission effect as in the case of the normal game state. As illustrated in FIG. 52, in the present embodiment, the reach notification is ended during the first reach symbol light emission effect, and the battle start effect is started accordingly. The flow of the effect during the hit notification and the loss notification is described in FIGS. 33 to 36, and thus the description thereof is omitted in FIG. 52.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 53 and 54, an example of the reach light emission effect in the probability variation gaming state will be described. FIG. 53 is an explanatory diagram for describing an example of the first reach symbol light emission effect in the probability variation game state. FIG. 54 is an explanatory diagram for explaining an example of the flow after the end of the first reach symbol light emission effect in the probability variation gaming state.

As illustrated in FIGS. 53A and 53B, in this example, the reach is established with the “3” symbol. In addition, FIG. 53(A) exemplifies a state in which the non-reach light emission effect due to the temporary stop of the left symbol is finished, and the reach-inspiring effect is exercised for initiating the temporary stop of the three symbols as the right symbol. .. In the reach-inspiring effect, for example, an effect image in which the lower part of the right pattern appears to be illuminated by friction is displayed (see FIG. 53(A)). After the reach fueling effect, there are cases where the reach is established and cases where the reach is not established. FIG. 53(B) illustrates the state when the reach is established by the temporary stop of the right symbol. In the present embodiment, in the probability variation game state, unlike the case of the normal game state, the non-reach light emission effect accompanying the temporary stop of the right symbol is not executed (see FIG. 45).

As illustrated in FIG. 53C, for example, when a predetermined time (for example, 0.2 seconds) elapses after the right symbol is temporarily stopped, the first reach symbol light emission effect and the reach notification are started. .. FIG. 53C exemplifies a state in which the entire left symbol and the right symbol are emitting light by the effect image 80 related to the first reach symbol light emission effect. In addition, an effect sound related to reach notification (for example, a sound “reach”) is output from the speaker 24. The reach notification ends when the output of the effect sound ends. In the example of FIG. 53(C), the middle symbol is hidden. In addition, the small symbol 56 continues to change at high speed. In this example, the small symbol 56 continues to change at high speed until the decorative symbol 55 is completely stopped. It should be noted that the small symbol 56 may be displayed in the same reach mode as the decorative symbol 55 with the reach establishment.

FIG. 53D illustrates the state immediately after FIG. 53C. As illustrated in FIG. 53D, the left symbol and the right symbol become smaller while the entire effect image 80 keeps emitting light. Along with this, the left symbol moves to the left edge of the screen, and the right symbol moves to the right edge of the screen. Subsequently, as illustrated in FIG. 53(E), the left symbol and the right symbol complete the movement to both ends of the screen while the entire effect image 80 keeps emitting light, and the symbols do not become smaller than this. FIG. 53(E) illustrates an example in which the battle start effect is started during the first reach symbol light emission effect. The effect image 80 is erased so as to pop during the battle start effect, whereby the first reach symbol light emission effect ends. In the first reach pattern light emission effect in the probability variation game state, the number image 552 of the decorative pattern 55 can be completely seen through the effect image 80 as illustrated in FIG. 53(E) until the end thereof. do not become. In this respect, it differs from the first reach symbol light emission effect in the normal game state in which the number image 552 becomes visible during the first reach symbol light emission effect (see FIG. 48(F)).

As illustrated in FIGS. 53F and 53G, when the battle start effect is finished, the battle effect is started. For example, during the battle effect, as shown in FIG. 53(F), a chance increase indicating that the reliability is high may be executed. In this example, when the chance up is not executed, there is no flag beside the character performing the sumo wrestling (the default mode of the battle effect, see FIG. 53(G)). When the chance up is executed, a flag is hung up next to the character performing sumo wrestling (see FIG. 53(F)). It should be noted that even if this chance up is executed, it may be lost (when the chance up is executed, it may be a big hit). The gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment does not have the light emission pattern for increasing the chance, and the board lamp 25 and the frame lamp 37 emit light in the default light emitting pattern even when the opportunity is increased. For this reason, it is impossible to recognize that the chance up is being performed from the rendering means other than the liquid crystal screen 5. In other words, the liquid crystal screen 5 and the panel lamp 25 and/or the frame lamp 37 do not correspond to each other (they are not interlocked) with each other for increasing the chance.

After (F) or (G) of FIG. 53, as illustrated in (H) of FIG. 54, an image prompting the player to operate is displayed at the end of the battle effect. This effect is an effect that is executed only immediately before the decided effect, and is an effect that fuels the execution of the decided effect. Then, as illustrated in FIGS. 54(I) and (J), the decided effect is executed. In this decided effect, the character whose winning effect is executed when the battle effect is won is displayed on the full screen behind the operation promotion image 65 and the effective period image 651. This point is different from the operation promotion effect in the normal game state (for example, the mode illustrated in FIGS. 50Q and 50R) (the same mode may be used). As illustrated in FIGS. 54(I) and (J), as the operation promotion image 65, a white effect image is displayed at the start of the effective period, and this effect image is displayed after a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds). When erased, a detailed image of the projected effect button 26 may be better seen.

In the case of a variation pattern of a big hit, for example, according to an operation (or according to the end of a predetermined effective period), for example, a hit notification that an effect after the symbol-matching effect in “3” symbol-matching is executed is given. This is performed (see FIG. 54(K)). Since the specific example of the hit notification has been described above, the description thereof is omitted here. In the case of the variation pattern of the loss, the decorative pattern 55 is temporarily stopped in a mode showing the loss (see FIG. 54(L)). In this embodiment, in the probability variation gaming state, the combination of the decorative pattern 55 in the reach state and the medium pattern showing the number obtained by adding (or subtracting) 2 to the number shown by the decorative pattern 55 in the reach state is lost. It is a mode shown. In the case of notification of a loss by the reach loss eye, the non-reach light emission effect is not executed. In this respect, also in the probability variation game state, as in the case of the normal game state, it is different from the case that the non-reach light emission effect can be executed when the reach is not established even with the same loss notification. It should be noted that during the display of the reach lost eyes, the reach light emission effect, the hit light emission effect, and the chance eye light emission effect are not executed. In addition, in the positioning of the size in FIG. 18, the middle symbol during the tentative stop in the reach loser eye is “medium” having substantially the same size as during the pre-reach effect.

Subsequently, the model name display as illustrated in FIG. 54(M) is performed for a predetermined execution time (for example, 2 seconds). In the present embodiment, the model name display in the probability variation gaming state is slightly different from that in the normal gaming state. For example, the liquid crystal screen 5 is darkened, and the characters “butt sumo”, which is the model name of the gaming machine 1 in the present embodiment, and the main character (for example, the character A) are displayed. The model name display mode may be the same regardless of the game state. In this embodiment, after the model name is displayed in the probability variation game state, the loss is always notified. Therefore, the model name display in the probability variation gaming state functions as an effect that suggests a loss. Along with the end of the model name display, a background image for probability change is displayed, and the decorative pattern 55 without characters is temporarily stopped by the same reach-miss combination as that immediately before the model name is displayed, and then the main stop is performed (FIG. 54). (N) and (O)). The jackpot may be notified via the model name display. In this case, after a predetermined time (for example, 1 second) from the execution of the display of the model name, for example, the effect after the symbol alignment effect in the “3” symbol alignment (or “7” symbol alignment instead of the “3” symbol alignment) The hit notification may be performed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 55, the total number of times of the first reach symbol light emission effect, the second reach symbol light emission effect, and the hit light emission effect in the normal game state will be described. FIG. 55 is a table for explaining the total number of times of the first reach symbol light emission effect, the second reach symbol light emission effect, and the hit light emission effect in the normal game state. Note that FIG. 55 shows a case where the re-lottery effect is not performed during the winning notification. In FIG. 55, the effect name is described under the total number of times of the above-described effects corresponding to the decorative design 55 temporarily stopped during the reach light emission effect and the hit light emission effect. Specifically, description will be made with reference to the column of “reach establishment→N reach→variation pattern corresponding to jackpot”. For example, in such a variation pattern in which notification is given in the N reach effect, the total number of left symbols is three times, the total number of right symbols is three times, and the total number of middle symbols is two times. .. For the left symbol, the first reach symbol light emission effect, the first light emission effect, and the second light emission effect are executed. Similarly, for the right symbol, the first reach symbol light emission effect, the first light emission effect, and the second light emission effect are executed. The first light emission effect and the second light emission effect are executed for the middle pattern.

As illustrated in FIG. 55, in the present embodiment, in the normal gaming state, the middle symbol has a smaller total number of times than the left symbol (or the right symbol) in any variation pattern. Specifically, as illustrated in FIG. 55, in the present embodiment, the total number of left symbols and right symbols is the same in any variation pattern, and the types of effects executed are also the same. .. Regarding the second reach symbol light emission effect, there are a fluctuating pattern that can be executed and a fluctuating pattern that cannot be executed. Therefore, the total number of times for the left symbol and the right symbol may differ depending on the type of the variation pattern. The reach light emission effect is not executed for the medium pattern. The hit light emission effect can be executed in the case of a big hit regardless of the game state, but cannot be executed in the case of a loss. Therefore, in the case of a big hit, it is twice regardless of the variation pattern, and in the case of a loss, the light emission effect is not executed (that is, 0 times).

Next, with reference to FIG. 56, the total number of times of the first reach symbol light emission effect, the second reach symbol light emission effect, and the hit light emission effect in the probability variation game state will be described. FIG. 56 is a table for explaining the total number of times of the first reach symbol light emission effect, the second reach symbol light emission effect, and the hit light emission effect in the probability variation game state. In addition, in FIG. 56, the effect name is described under the total number of times of the above-described effects corresponding to the decorative design 55 temporarily stopped during the reach light emission effect and the hit light emission effect. Further, similarly to FIG. 55, FIG. 56 illustrates a case where the re-lottery effect is not performed during the winning notification. Specifically, a description will be made with reference to the column of “reach establishment→battle production→winning production→variation pattern corresponding to jackpot”. For example, in the variation pattern for notifying such a hit, the total number of left symbols is three times, the total number of right symbols is also three times, and the total number of middle symbols is two times. For the left symbol (and the right symbol), the first reach symbol light emission effect, the first light emission effect, and the second light emission effect are executed. The first light emission effect and the second light emission effect are executed for the middle pattern.

As illustrated in FIG. 56, in the present embodiment, even in the probability variation gaming state, as in the normal gaming state, the total number of times the middle symbol is the left symbol (or the right symbol) in any variation pattern. Few. Specifically, as illustrated in FIG. 56, in the present embodiment, the total number of left symbols and right symbols is the same in any variation pattern, and the types of effects performed are also the same. .. For the medium pattern, the variation pattern in which the winning effect of the jackpot is executed is twice. In the case of a variation pattern in which the defeat effect is executed and a variation pattern in which the draw effect is lost in the jackpot, the light emission effect is not executed (that is, 0 times).

In both cases of FIG. 55 and FIG. 56, in the case of the flow in which the second light emission effect is executed for the second time after the re-lottery effect is performed during the hit notification (see FIG. 27), the variation pattern of each jackpot. Corresponding to, the total number of times is increased by one by the amount of the second light emission effect of the second time.

Comparing FIG. 55 and FIG. 56, in the present embodiment, the first reach symbol light emission effect, the second reach symbol light emission effect, and the hit light emission effect are relatively greater in the normal game state than in the probability variation game state. It can be executed many times. In addition, for each of the left symbol, the right symbol, and the middle symbol, the total number of the first reach symbol light emission effect, the second reach symbol light emission effect, and the hit light emission effect may be the same regardless of the game state, or the normal game state. The number of cases may be smaller than that in the probability variation gaming state.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the first reach symbol light emission effect, the second reach symbol light emission effect, and the hit light emission effect can be executed. In any game state (or in a predetermined game state), the first reach symbol light emission effect and the second reach symbol light emission effect cannot be executed, and the hit light emission effect may be executed. As a result, any of the left symbol, the right symbol, and the middle symbol is twice in the case of a big hit (first light emission effect and second light emission effect), and is zero in the case of a loss. That is, regardless of whether or not it is a big hit, the total number of the above-mentioned effects (specifically, the number of hit light-emitting effects only) is the same for the left symbol, the right symbol, and the middle symbol. In such a configuration, the reach line effect may or may not be executable.

In the normal game state, the first reach symbol light emission effect, the second reach symbol light emission effect, the hit light emission effect, and the non-reach light emission effect (see FIGS. 44 and 55) during the variable display of the special symbol once. The total number of times is the same for the left symbol and the right symbol, and the middle symbol is the smallest. In the probability variation game state, the total number of the above-mentioned effects during one variable display of special symbols increases in the order of the left symbol, the right symbol, and the middle symbol (see FIGS. 45 and 56). The total number of times of the above effects may be the same for each of the left symbol, the right symbol, and the middle symbol regardless of the gaming state.

In the present embodiment, a specific symbol indicating contents other than numbers may be displayed as a decorative symbol regardless of the game state. The specific symbol is, for example, a pseudo symbol that is temporarily stopped to notify that the pseudo symbol is executed, a development symbol that is temporarily stopped to notify the effect of the development destination (for example, SP reach effect), and the like. Depending on the specific symbol, the non-reach light emission effect, the reach light emission effect, and the hit light emission effect are not executed in some cases. Therefore, the total number of times of the above-mentioned effect of the specific symbol is 0 regardless of the game state. In other embodiments, the effect may be executed corresponding to a specific symbol regardless of the game state, or in the case of a specific game state (for example, a normal game state), corresponding to the specific symbol. The effect may be executed. Further, while the effect is executed for a predetermined specific symbol (for example, a pseudo continuous symbol), the effect may not be executed for another specific symbol (for example, a developed symbol).

In the present embodiment, during the variable display of one special symbol, the first reach symbol light emission effect, the second reach symbol light emission effect, and the hit light emission effect correspond to the decorative symbol 55 temporarily stopped when the reach is established. It may be executed. On the other hand, during the variable display, there is no case where the light emission effect is executed corresponding to the decorative pattern 55 that is not temporarily stopped when the reach is established. Therefore, the decorative pattern 55 that is temporarily stopped when the reach is established has a higher execution ratio of the light emission effect than the decorative pattern 55 that is not temporarily stopped when the reach is established.

Further, regarding the total number of the first reach symbol light emission effect and the second reach symbol light emission effect, the number of executions during the variable display of the special symbol is one in the normal game state than in the probability variation game state. Many. The total number of times the first reach symbol light emission effect and the second reach symbol light emission effect may be the same regardless of the game state, or may be less in the normal game state than in the probability variation game state.

As illustrated in FIG. 44, FIG. 45, FIG. 55, and FIG. 56, the light emission effect for each variation pattern (in this paragraph, non-reach medium light emission effect, first reach pattern light emission effect, second reach pattern light emission effect, The total number of times of the one light emission effect and the second light emission effect differs depending on the variation pattern. For example, in the case of a variation pattern in which a pseudo-relation is hit by an inexecutable N reach effect, a non-reach medium emission effect corresponding to the left symbol, a non-reach medium emission effect corresponding to the right symbol, and the first reach symbol emission It is five times of the production, the first light emission production, and the second light emission production. In addition, for example, in the case of a variation pattern in which pseudo-relation cannot be executed and a hit notification is given by an SP reach effect that has evolved from the N-reach effect, light emission in the case of a variation pattern in which a hit notification is given by an N-reach effect that cannot be executed Since the second reach symbol light emission effect is executed in addition to the effect, the total number is 6 times. In this example, the total number of light emission effects is the same in the two variation patterns up to the end of the N reach effect, and is different in the two variation patterns after the end of the N reach effect. In this way, by partially varying the total number of light emission effects depending on the variation pattern, it is possible to prevent the effects from becoming monotonous. The total number of light emission effects may be different for each variation pattern. That is, when there are a plurality of variation patterns capable of executing a predetermined effect, the total number of times is different for each variation pattern in the part up to the end of the predetermined effect (for example, N reach effect) and the part after the end of the predetermined effect. May be.

It should be noted that the effect image 80 of a color that indicates the degree of reliability may be displayed by the first reach pattern light emission effect. Moreover, you may display the effect image 82 of the color which shows the high or low of reliability by 2nd reach pattern light emission production. The colors of the effect images 80 and 82 may be determined by random number lottery based on the result of the special symbol determination by the effect control unit 130, or may be uniquely determined according to the type of reach effect, It may be uniquely determined according to the type of the decorative pattern 55 forming the reach.

(Chance light emission production)
Next, the opportunity light emission effect when the opportunity eye stops will be described. Here, the chance eye does not show that it is a jackpot itself, but in the fluctuations after the current fluctuation of the special symbol, or in the fluctuations of the current special symbol, it is possible to be a jackpot. It is a decorative pattern (or a combination of specific decorative patterns). The chance eye that suggests the possibility of a big hit in the subsequent fluctuations is called the “look-ahead chance eye”. The look-ahead chance is an effect that is performed based on the result of the preliminary determination, and is an effect that covers a variation of one or more special symbols.

In the present embodiment, the decorative design is classified into a plurality of types for each color that indicates high or low reliability. Specifically, the decorative design is a blue design that is blue (“2”, “4”, “6”, and an even design of “8”) and a green design that is green (“1”, “5”, "9" odd number pattern) and red red patterns ("3", "7" symbols) are classified. A combination of three decorative patterns of the same classification constitutes a look-ahead chance. A look-ahead chance eye composed of blue patterns is called "blue chance eye", a look-ahead chance eye composed of green patterns is called "green chance eye", and a look-ahead chance eye composed of red patterns is called "red chance eye". For example, a combination of decorative symbols “442” and “664” in order from the left is the blue chance eye. Further, depending on the classification of each decorative symbol that constitutes the pre-reading chance, the reliability of being a jackpot in the variation of the special symbol after the next differs. Specifically, the reliability increases in the order of blue chance, green chance, and red chance. Further, when the pre-reading chance eye is displayed, the pre-reading chance light emission effect is performed on each decorative pattern 55.

Hereinafter, with reference to FIGS. 57 to 59, the pre-reading chance light emission effect in the normal game state will be described.

FIG. 57 is a diagram showing an example of the flow of effects over a variation of a plurality of special symbols when the look-ahead chance is displayed. FIG. 58 is a diagram showing an example of an image displayed on the screen when the effect shown in FIG. 57 is executed. FIG. 59 is a diagram showing an example of the effect following FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 57 and 58(A), for example, when two first special symbol determination rights (holding icons 51a and 51b) are held, time t0 during the change of the first special symbol. In, when a game ball is won in the first starting opening 11, the right of the first special symbol determination related to the winning is suspended (a "suspend icon 51c" is newly added). Here, the hold icons 51a, 51b, and 51c are described as "hold 1", "hold 2", and "hold 3", respectively. Preliminary determination is performed at the time of winning the game ball related to this hold 3. The right to be pre-determined is referred to as "prefetch target".

Next, at time t1, the variation of the first special symbol ends, the variation effect ends, and the loss is notified (FIG. 58(A)). Next, at time t2, the first special symbol determination relating to the hold 1 is performed, and three decorative symbols 55 start varying in response to the variation start of the first special symbol (FIG. 58(B)). After a lapse of a predetermined time from the start of fluctuation, the decorative symbol 55 (for example, “4” symbol) is temporarily stopped in the left area (t3 in FIG. 57, FIG. 58(C)). Then, the decorative pattern 55 (for example, the "2" pattern) is temporarily stopped in the right area (t4 in FIG. 57, FIG. 58(D)). After that, the decorative pattern 55 (for example, the "4" pattern) is temporarily stopped in the middle area (t5 in FIG. 57, FIG. 58(E)). As a result, the three decorative patterns 55 (“442”) that suggest a loss are displayed. The combination of these three decorative patterns 55 is a blue chance eye. The three small symbols 56 continue to change at high speed while the decorative symbols 55 are temporarily stopped in the left region, the right region, and the middle region.

When the pre-reading chance eye is displayed, the pre-reading chance light emission effect is performed. That is, after the decorative pattern 55 is temporarily stopped in the middle area, or at the timing when the decorative pattern 55 is temporarily stopped in the middle area, or immediately before the decorative pattern 55 is temporarily stopped in the middle area, the three decorative patterns 55 are The pre-reading chance light emission effect is performed (t6 in FIG. 57, FIG. 58(F)). Specifically, an effect image 91 for emphasizing each design is added to each of the three decorative designs 55 so that the three decorative designs 55 emit light. The effect image 91 may be an image displayed around each decorative pattern 55, an image displayed in front of each decorative pattern 55 in a superimposed manner, or behind each decorative pattern 55. It may be an image displayed in. At this time, the three decorative patterns 55 are in a character presence mode in which a character is added to a numerical pattern, and are in a mode of size “medium”. While the look-ahead chance light emission effect is performed on the three decorative symbols 55, each decorative symbol 55 may be displayed for a moment larger than each decorative symbol when the non-reach medium luminous effect is performed. In this case, each decorative pattern 55 is displayed smaller than the decorative pattern 55 during the first light emission effect in the above-described hit light emission effect. Further, each decorative pattern 55 in the pre-reading chance light emission effect may be displayed larger than the decorative pattern in the second light emission effect in the hit light emission effect. Note that the three small symbols 56 continue to change at high speed even during the pre-reading chance light emission effect.

The effect image 91 differs depending on the type of the decorative pattern 55 to be stopped. Specifically, when the blue chance eye (for example, “442”) is displayed, the blue-tinged effect image 91 is displayed. When the green chance eye (for example, “115”) is displayed, the greenish effect image 91 is displayed. Further, when the red chance eye (for example, “337”) is displayed, the reddish effect image 91 is displayed. The effect image 91 used for the look-ahead chance light emission effect is the effect image in the hit light emission effect (the effect image 61 used for the first light emission effect and the effect image 62 used for the second light emission effect) and the non-reach medium light emission effect. It is an image different from the image used and the image used for the reach light emission effect.

When the pre-reading chance is displayed, a lamp light emission effect is performed in which the board lamp 25 and/or the frame lamp 37 are caused to emit light in a manner suggesting the pre-reading chance. The look-ahead chance light emission effect performed on the liquid crystal screen 5 and the lamp light emission effect performed using the board lamp 25 and/or the frame lamp 37 are interlocked. In this lamp light emission effect, the effect means capable of emitting light emits light in a color that indicates high or low reliability (specifically, the same color as the color of the pre-read chance). Specifically, when the blue chance eye is displayed, the lamp light emission effect in which the board lamp 25 and/or the frame lamp 37 emits blue light is performed at the timing when the prefetch chance light emission effect related to the blue chance eye is performed. Done. Further, when the green chance eye is displayed, the lamp light emission effect that the panel lamp 25 and/or the frame lamp 37 emits green light is performed at the timing when the prefetch chance eye light emission effect related to the green chance eye is performed. In addition, when the red chance eye is displayed, the lamp light emission effect in which the board lamp 25 and/or the frame lamp 37 emits red light is performed at the timing when the prefetch chance light emission effect related to the red chance eye is performed.

That is, when the pre-reading chance eye is displayed, the pre-reading chance light emission effect and the lamp emission effect related to the pre-reading chance eye are performed in conjunction with each other.

After the pre-reading chance light emission effect is executed, the variation of the first special symbol ends, and the three decorative symbols 55 are permanently stopped (t7 in FIG. 57, FIG. 58(G)). When the three decorative symbols 55 are completely stopped, the effect image 91 is not displayed and the prefetch chance light emission effect is finished. The effect image 91 is displayed before the main stop of the decorative design 55, and the effect image 91 is not displayed when the decorative design 55 is main stopped, so that it is possible to emphasize the look-ahead chance eye to the player and the decoration at the time of the main stop. The visibility of the design 55 can be prevented from being hindered. When the look-ahead chance light emission effect ends, the lamp light emission effect also ends. Even after the pre-reading chance light emission effect is finished, the corresponding lamp light emission effect may be continued. That is, even when the three decorative symbols are permanently stopped (when the first special symbol is stopped), the panel lamp 25 and/or the frame lamp 37 may continue to emit blue light. In this case, the lamp light emission effect related to the look-ahead chance may end at the start of the next change. At the timing when the three decorative symbols 55 are stopped (timing at which the special symbol is stopped and displayed), the three small symbols 56 are also stopped.

Next, the first special symbol determination relating to the hold 2 is performed, and the variation of the first special symbol is started, and the three decorative symbols 55 are varied (t8 in FIG. 57, FIG. 58(H)). Similarly to the above regarding the hold 2, the left symbol is stopped (t9 in FIG. 57, FIG. 58(I)), and the right symbol is stopped (t10 in FIG. 57, FIG. 59(J)).

After that, the middle symbol is stopped (t11 in FIG. 57, FIG. 59(K)). At this time, the three decorative patterns 55 may be "155" in order from the left. The combination of these three decorative patterns 55 is the green chance eye.

After the decorative design 55 is temporarily stopped in the middle area, or at the timing when the decorative design 55 is temporarily stopped in the middle area, or immediately before the decorative design 55 is temporarily stopped in the middle area, a pre-reading chance for the three decorative designs 55 Eye light emission effect is performed (t12 of FIG. 57, FIG. 59(L)). Specifically, a greenish effect image 91 for highlighting each design is added to each of the three decorative designs 55 so that the three decorative designs 55 emit green light. Further, in conjunction with this pre-reading chance light emission effect, a lamp light emission effect corresponding to the green chance eye is also performed. Specifically, the board lamp 25 and/or the frame lamp 37 emits green light in response to the green pre-reading chance light emission effect. Note that the three small symbols 56 continue to change at high speed even during the pre-reading chance light emission effect related to the green chance.

Then, the variation of the first special symbol ends, and the three decorative symbols 55 are stopped (t13 in FIG. 57, FIG. 59(M)). Further, at the timing when the three decorative symbols 55 are permanently stopped, the three small symbols 56 are also permanently stopped. When the three decorative symbols 55 are completely stopped, the effect image 91 is not displayed and the prefetch chance light emission effect is finished. Furthermore, after that, the fluctuation related to the hold 3 (the fluctuation related to the prefetch target) is started (t14 in FIG. 57, FIG. 59(N)). When it is determined that the jackpot in the special symbol determination at the start of this variation, the jackpot is notified in this variation. In this case, during the hit notification, the above-described hit light emission effect (first light emission effect, second light emission effect) is performed.

The pre-reading chance light emission effect is executed when the result of the special symbol determination is a loss and the loss variation pattern (HP1 to HP3) is selected, and the reach variation pattern (RP1 to RP4) is selected. If not done.

When the hit notification is performed in the variation related to the prefetch target, the period from the start (or end) of the hit light emission effect (first light emission effect and/or second light emission effect) to the main stop of the decorative pattern 55 (decoration The swinging period of the design 55) is a period from the start (or end) of the look-ahead chance light emission effect performed in the change before the change related to the read-ahead target to the final stop of the decorative design 55 (swing of the decorative design 55). Dynamic period: longer than, for example, the period from time t6 to t7, the period from time t12 to t13). The relationship between these swing periods may be reversed or the same. That is, when the hit notification is performed in the variation related to the prefetch target, the period from the start (or end) of the hit light emission effect to the main stop of the decorative pattern 55 (the swing period of the decorative pattern 55) is related to the prefetch target. It may be shorter than the period from the start (or end) of the pre-reading chance light emission effect performed in the change before the change to the main stop of the decorative pattern 55, or may be the same.

Moreover, when the hit notification is performed in the change related to the prefetch target, the execution time of the hit light emission effect (first light emission effect and/or the second light emission effect) is performed in the change before the change related to the prefetch target. In contrast to the execution time of the look-ahead chance light emission effect, the reliability of the hit light emission effect (the first light emission effect and/or the second light emission effect) is the highest. Reliability (pre-reading chance light emission effect related to the red chance eye). The relationship between these execution periods may be reversed or the same. That is, when the hit notification is performed in the change related to the prefetch target, the execution time of the hit light emission effect may be longer than the execution time of the preread chance eye light emission effect performed in the change before the change related to the preread target. But they can be the same.

Further, the pre-reading chance light emission effect has a plurality of modes with different degrees of reliability (pre-reading chance light emission effect for the blue chance eye, pre-reading chance eye light emission effect for the green chance eye, pre-reading chance eye light emission effect for the red chance eye). However, there may be only one mode of the winning luminous effect (first luminous effect and/or second luminous effect). Further, the pre-reading chance light emission effect may have a plurality of modes with different degrees of reliability, and the winning light emission effect may have a plurality of modes (same reliability).

In the pre-reading chance, the color of each decorative pattern forming the pre-reading chance and the color related to the pre-reading chance light emission effect are the same (same), but each decorative pattern is not classified by color. May be. In this case, the mode of the pre-reading chance light emission effect may be changed by the color of the effect image added to each decorative pattern, and the color may indicate the reliability. For example, in the case where the “2” symbol and the “4” symbol are white, when the chance eye of “442” is displayed, by displaying a blue or green effect image around each decorative symbol, A greenish look-ahead chance light emission effect may be executed.

In addition, the look-ahead chance light emission effect is not limited to the mode in which the effect image is displayed around each decorative pattern, but the whole or a part of the background image is given a predetermined color (blue, green, red, etc.) that indicates reliability. May be changed to.

In the above description, when the pre-reading chance is displayed, the decorative patterns in the left area, the right area, and the middle area are sequentially stopped, but the order in which the decorative patterns are stopped is not limited to this. Further, even when the decorative patterns in the left area, the right area, and the middle area stop at the same time, the prefetch chance eye may be temporarily stopped and the preread chance eye light emission effect may be performed.

Further, in the above description, the pre-reading chance eye is configured by the three decorative patterns 55, but the pre-reading chance eye may be configured by one or two decorative patterns 55. Further, the pre-reading chance may be configured using not only numbers but also symbols with letters. Further, in the above description, the decorative patterns forming the pre-reading chances are the same as the decorative patterns of the same classification, but the pre-reading chances may be displayed using any decorative pattern. In this case, if the look-ahead chance light emission effect (effect image 91) is executed, it becomes the look-ahead chance regardless of the type of the decorative pattern 55 to be stopped.

Further, in the above, the case where the prefetch chance item is displayed in the normal game state has been described, but the prefetch chance item may be displayed in the probability variation game state and/or the time saving game state.

As described above, even when the pre-reading chance eye based on the result of the preliminary determination is displayed, the pre-reading chance light emission effect for the decorative pattern 55 is performed. As a result, the player's expectation can be increased and interest can be improved.

Next, the chances that suggest the possibility of a big hit in the current fluctuation of the special symbol will be described. The chance eye that suggests the possibility of a big hit in the current change in the special symbol is called the “opportunity eye”.

The chance opportunity is a combination of specific decorative symbols or a temporary suspension of a specific symbol (specific image) in one change of the special symbol. For example, the chance item may be a specific combination of the three decorative symbols 55 with numbers (for example, “123” or “456”). Further, the chance eye may be an effect in which one specific symbol (specific image) is displayed. For example, the specific symbol (specific image) may be an image written as "NEXT" or "continuation" that suggests a pseudo-variable effect (pseudo-relation).

Even when the chance eye is displayed, the light emission effect (hereinafter, referred to as “the chance eye light emission effect”) for the decorative pattern (image) forming the chance eye is performed. Hereinafter, as the chance eye, the chance eye light emission effect in the case where the image indicating the pseudo-relation is stopped will be described. Here, the light-emission effect for the design (image) suggesting the pseudo-relation may be referred to as "pseudo-repetitive light-emission effect".

FIG. 60 is a diagram showing an example of the variation effect when the NEXT symbol indicating the pseudo-relation is displayed in the normal game state. FIG. 61 is a diagram showing an example of an image displayed on the screen when the variation effect shown in FIG. 57 is executed.

As shown in FIGS. 60 and 61, when the variation of the special symbol is started, the variation of the three decorative symbols 55 is started (FIG. 61(A)). When a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of variation of the special symbol, the decorative symbol 55 is temporarily stopped in the left area (FIG. 61(B)), and then the decorative symbol 55 is temporarily stopped in the right area (FIG. 61(C)). Next, the "NEXT" symbol that suggests pseudo-relation moves from the upper side to the lower side in the middle region, and a pseudo-relational effect that expects that the pseudo-relation is performed is performed (FIG. 61(D)). Then, the "NEXT" symbol that suggests that pseudo-linking will be performed is temporarily stopped in the middle area, and it is notified that pseudo-linking will be performed (FIG. 61(E)).

For example, in the pseudo continuous production, an image in which "NEXT" that indicates pseudo continuous is written and a decorative pattern 55 in which a number is written are variably displayed in the middle area which is the display area of the decorative pattern 55. The effect of whether or not the image of is temporarily displayed in the middle area is displayed. In this case, the image written as "NEXT" may be displayed by being superimposed on the decorative pattern 55 of the numbers displayed in the middle area. Alternatively, in the pseudo continuous production, the image written as “NEXT” may be displayed semitransparently or may be moved in the display area of the three decorative patterns 55 including the left area, the middle area, and the right area. May be. Then, when the image written as “NEXT” is displayed in the three display areas (when the translucent image is changed to a clear image or when the image that has been moved and displayed is temporarily stopped), the pseudo image is displayed. It is notified that a ream will be held.

At this time, a pseudo continuous light emission effect in which the "NEXT" symbol is emitted is performed. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 61(E), the effect image 92 is displayed around the "NEXT" symbol, and the "NEXT" symbol is highlighted. It should be noted that the effect image 92 may be displayed by being superimposed on the front side or the rear side of the “NEXT” symbol. The effect image 92 is the effect images 61 and 62 in the above-mentioned hit light emission effect, the effect image 91 used for the chance eye light emission effect related to the pre-reading chance, and the light emission effect (reach light emission) for other decorative patterns performed on the liquid crystal screen 5. It is an image different from the effect image used for the effect, the non-reach light emission effect). It should be noted that, by the pseudo continuous light emission effect, an effect image 92 of a color indicating high or low reliability (for example, any of blue, green, red, and zebra indicating the possibility of a big hit, or a rainbow color indicating a big hit). May be displayed. For example, the color of the effect image 92 may be uniquely determined in accordance with the number of pseudo runs, or may be determined by the effect control unit 130 by random number lottery based on the result of the special symbol determination.

Further, as shown in the figure, the left and right decorative patterns 55 that have been displayed immediately before may be hidden, and an image indicating that pseudo-linking is performed may be displayed on the entire screen. It should be noted that during the pseudo continuous light emission effect, the three decorative symbols 55 may be temporarily stopped by being superimposed on the back side of the “NEXT” symbol, or may be changed at high speed (or changed at low speed). In addition, a lamp light emission effect is also performed in conjunction with this pseudo continuous light emission effect. The lamp light emission effect corresponding to this pseudo continuous light emission effect is the above-described lamp light emission effect corresponding to the hit light emission effect, the lamp light emission effect corresponding to the look-ahead chance, the lamp light emission corresponding to the reach light emission effect, and the non-reach medium light emission effect. The effect is different from the corresponding lamp emission. In the lamp light emission effect corresponding to the pseudo continuous light emission effect, the panel lamp 25 and/or the frame lamp 37 emits light in a color corresponding to the pseudo continuous light emission effect which suggests the pseudo continuous light emission effect. In addition, depending on the lamp light emission effect corresponding to the pseudo continuous light emission effect, a color indicating high or low reliability (for example, any one of blue, green, red, and zebra indicating the possibility of a big hit. Or a rainbow indicating a big hit) The panel lamp 25 and/or the frame lamp 37 may emit light depending on the color. This color may be uniquely determined in accordance with the pseudo continuous light emission effect, or may be determined by the random number lottery based on the result of the special symbol determination by the effect control unit 130.

In addition, when the pseudo-repeating is not performed, as a result of the pseudo-reciprocating effect, the "NEXT" symbol is not temporarily stopped (the image written as "NEXT" is not temporarily stopped and displayed), and the pseudo-repetitive flashing effect is produced. Is also not done.

After the image indicating that the pseudo-repeating is performed is displayed, the three decorative patterns 55 are changed again (FIG. 61(F)). At this time, for example, the pseudo frequency image 93 is displayed in the upper left area of the screen. The pseudo count image 93 is an image showing the number of pseudo runs, and in the case of the first re-change (“pseudo 2”), the image written “×2” is displayed. When a predetermined time elapses from the start of the first re-variation, the “NEXT” symbol may be temporarily stopped (FIG. 61(G)). As a result, it is notified that the second re-change (“pseudo 3”) will be performed. Also at this time, the effect image 92 is displayed around the "NEXT" symbol.

Then, the second re-variation (“pseudo 3”) is performed, and the pseudo number image 93 changes to “×3” (FIG. 61(H)). After that, the decorative symbols 55 of the same kind are temporarily stopped on the left and right, and reach is established (FIG. 61(I)), and reach production is performed. After that, since the effect proceeds in the same manner as described above, the description will be omitted.

Here, unlike the "1" symbol to the "9" symbol, the "NEXT" symbol that suggests the pseudo-relation is not a symbol with a numeral attached thereto, nor is it a symbol used at the time of hit notification. However, the "NEXT" symbol is an image that is variably displayed similarly to the numbered decorative symbol 55 in the area where the decorative symbol 55 is changed, and by being temporarily stopped from the variably displayed state, This is to make the player expect (guess) the result of the special symbol determination. Therefore, the “NEXT” symbol can be regarded as a kind of the decorative symbol 55. It can be said that the pseudo continuous light emission effect that is performed along with the temporary stop of the "NEXT" symbol is a light emission factor for the decorative symbol. The "NEXT" symbol may be an image different from the decorative symbol.

In addition, in FIG. 61, the example in which the image indicating the pseudo-relation is displayed after the decorative pattern 55 is temporarily stopped in the left region and the right region has been described. The decorative pattern 55 may be displayed after being temporarily stopped in at least one of the middle areas.

Further, even if the decorative pattern 55 is not temporarily stopped in any of the left area, the right area, and the middle area, an image suggesting pseudo-relation may be displayed. In this case, after the image indicating the pseudo run is displayed (temporarily stopped), the number of pseudo runs shown by the pseudo number image 93 increases by “1”. That is, even if none of the three decorative patterns 55 is temporarily stopped, pseudo-linking may be performed, and it may be suggested that the current fluctuation continues.

Further, the effect shown in FIG. 61 is supposed to be performed in the normal game state, but the pseudo continuous and pseudo continuous light emission effects may be performed in the probability variation game state and/or the time saving game state.

In addition, in FIG. 61, the case where the pseudo-relation is performed has been described, but a combination of specific decorative symbols (for example, “1”, “2”, and “3” of the symbols) suggesting that the specific production is developed. Similarly, in the case where the chance eyes composed of regular eyes and reach lose eyes are displayed, the chance eye emission effect corresponding to the chance eyes may be performed for each decorative pattern. For example, the specific effect may be an effect that causes the player to expect the stop of the "7" symbol arrangement. The combination of specific decorative symbols may be temporarily stopped during the pre-reach effect, or may be temporarily stopped after the reach is established.

In addition, a decorative pattern that suggests a specific effect, for example, a development pattern that suggests that the reach effect is developed (for example, an image in which "development" is written), is relatively reliable (around 10%). A chance pattern (for example, an image written as “chance”) that suggests, a superheated pattern that indicates that the reliability is 50% or more (for example, an image written as “superheat”) is temporarily stopped. Good. Similar to the "NEXT" symbol, these images are also variably displayed in the area in which the decorative symbol 55 fluctuates, and are temporarily stopped from the variably displayed state, so that the player can determine the special symbol. It makes you expect (guess) the results. Therefore, these images can also be regarded as a kind of decorative design. Even when these images (decorative patterns) are temporarily stopped, the light emission effect may be performed on the temporarily stopped images.

In addition, in the above, when the decorative pattern 55 is temporarily stopped, the light emission effect for the decorative pattern is performed. For example, when the decorative pattern 55 is displayed in the form of a big hit, and before the decorative pattern 55 is stopped, the hit light emission effect (first light emission effect and/or second light emission effect) is performed. In addition, when the look-ahead chance eye is displayed using the decorative pattern 55, the look-ahead chance light emission effect is performed when the decorative pattern 55 is displayed in a lost form and before the decorative pattern 55 is completely stopped. It was In the present embodiment, based on the result of the special symbol determination or the preliminary determination, the light emission effect (start-time light emission effect) for the decorative symbol 55 may be performed even when the decorative symbol 55 starts to change. The start-time light emission effect may be executed in a variation in which the hit light emission effect is performed, may be executed in a variation in which the hit light emission effect is not performed, or may be executed in a variation in which the pre-read chance is displayed. Alternatively, it may be executed in a variation in which the prefetch chance is not displayed. The start light emission effect is different from the hit light emission effect and the look-ahead chance eye light emission effect in a color that indicates high or low reliability (for example, blue, green, red, or zebra that indicates the possibility of a big hit). Or, it is a production in which a rainbow-colored decorative pattern 55 that suggests a big hit emits light. For example, in the start-time emission effect, a red effect image may be displayed for each of the three decorative patterns 55 when the three decorative patterns 55 start changing. The start-time light emission effect is an effect that suggests the reliability in the current change of the special symbol, and the reliability in the change may be suggested by the emission color of the decorative pattern 55 in the start-time light emission effect. While the start light emission effect and the pre-reading chance light emission effect have a plurality of effect modes (red, green, etc.), the hit light effect may have one effect mode.

In the variation in which the hit light emission effect is performed, the start-time light emission effect may be easily performed at the start of the variation. That is, when the start-time light emission effect is executed immediately after the special symbol starts changing, the hit light-emission effect may be easier to be performed in the change of the special symbol than when the start-time light emission effect is not executed. Further, when the winning light emission effect is performed in the variation, the start-time light emission effect may be executed more easily at the start of the variation than in the case where the prefetch chance eye light emission effect is performed in the variation. Further, when the start-time light emission effect is executed, the pre-reading chance eye light emission effect may be performed in the variation.

As described above, even when the chance eye is displayed based on the result of the special symbol determination, the look-ahead chance eye light emission effect for the decorative symbol 55 is performed. As a result, the player's expectation can be increased and interest can be improved.

Comparing the sizes of the images related to the light emission effects in the present embodiment, the effect image 82, the effect image 62, the effect image 64, the non-reach light emission effect image 70, the effect image 91, the effect image 80, the effect image 92. , Effect image 60, effect image 63, and effect image 61, in that order. The reach line image 81 is longer in the lateral direction (longitudinal direction) than any of the above images. The reach line image 81 is at least shorter than the effect images 60, 61, 63, 80 in the vertical direction (shorter direction) and at least longer than the effect image 82.

In the present embodiment, when the display positions of the respective images relating to the respective light emission effects are compared in the vertical direction (shorter direction) of the liquid crystal screen 5, the following relationships may be obtained. Specifically, for example, the upper ends of the effect images 60, 61, 63, 70, 80 are located above the upper ends of the effect images 62, 64 and the reach line image 81. Further, the upper ends of the effect images 60, 61, 63, 70, 80 may be located above the upper end of the effect image 80 or may be the same. Further, for example, the effect image 82 is located above the reach line image 81. Further, for example, the upper end of the non-reach medium emission effect image 70 and the upper ends of the effect images 91 and 92 may be located below or above the upper ends of the effect images 60, 61, 63, 70, and 80. May be located.

The respective images (specifically, the effect images 60 to 64, 70, 80, 82, 91, 92 and the reach line image 81) related to the respective light emission effects may be erased at once, or the entire image may be partially erased. The time until the data is erased may differ. For example, each of the images becomes scattered in a radial manner from the central portion of the image, and the contour portion may remain around the liquid crystal screen 5 even after the central portion disappears (for example, the decorative pattern 55). May be overlaid on the front side of). Further, each of the images may be erased, for example, while the shape of the contour changes discontinuously (a part may be discontinuous) so that the contour cannot be clearly represented. Further, each of the images may be erased after a state in which the contour cannot be clearly represented due to a change in the transmittance from near the contour toward the contour.

Next, the swing period of the decorative pattern 55 after the above-described prefetch chance light emission effect, reach light emission effect, and hit light emission effect (first light emission effect and/or second light emission effect) are executed will be described.

FIG. 62 is a diagram showing a comparison of swing periods of the decorative pattern 55 when the pre-reading chance light emission effect, the reach light emission effect, and the hit light emission effect are executed.

As shown in FIG. 62A, when the pre-reading chance eye is executed, after the pre-reading chance light emission effect is executed, the three decorative symbols 55 are Rock. Specifically, the production control unit 130, when receiving the fluctuation stop command from the game control unit 100, permanently stops the three decorative symbols 55 on the liquid crystal screen 5. After that, when the fluctuation start command is received at the start of fluctuation of the next special symbol, the effect control unit 130 starts fluctuation of the three decorative symbols 55 that have been stopped.

Further, as shown in FIG. 62(B), when the reach effect is performed, after the reach light emission effect is performed according to the reach establishment, the decorative pattern 55 swings for a predetermined period. Specifically, during the reach effect, the left and right decorative designs 55 swing, and the decorative design 55 in the middle area fluctuates at high speed. Then, as a result of the reach effect, whether or not it is a big hit is notified, and after three decorative symbols 55 swing for a predetermined period, three decorative symbols 55 are permanently stopped in response to a variation stop command from the game control unit 100. To do. After that, when the fluctuation start command is received at the start of fluctuation of the next special symbol, the effect control unit 130 starts fluctuation of the three decorative symbols 55 that have been stopped.

Further, as shown in FIG. 62(C), when the hit notification is made, after the hit light emission effect is made, the three decorative symbols 55 are swung, and in response to a variation stop command from the game control unit 100. The three decorative patterns 55 are stopped. After that, the opening command is transmitted from the game control unit 100 to the effect control unit 130. The effect control unit 130 executes the opening effect based on the opening command, further receives the round start command from the game control unit 100, and executes the jackpot effect. Next, the effect control unit 130 receives the ending command from the game control unit 100 at the end of the jackpot game, and performs the ending effect. Then, the effect control unit 130 receives a variation start command based on the next special symbol determination from the game control unit 100, executes a variation effect of varying the decorative symbol 55 based on the variation start command, and responds to the variation. A variation stop command to be received is received from the game control unit 100, and the decorative pattern 55 is stopped.

When the effect control unit 130 normally receives the command from the game control unit 100, the swing period FT1 of the decorative pattern 55 after the look-ahead chance light emission effect starts (or ends), and the reach light emission effect starts (or When the swing period FT2 of the decorative pattern 55 after the end) is compared with the swing period FT3 of the decorative pattern 55 after the winning light emission effect (first light emission effect or second light emission effect) starts (or ends) , FT1<FT3<FT2. These relationships may be FT3<FT1<FT2.

On the other hand, when the effect control unit 130 does not normally receive the command from the game control unit 100, the relationship of the swing period may change.

FIG. 63 is a diagram showing a comparison of swing periods of decorative symbols when the effect control unit 130 does not normally receive a command from the game control unit 100.

As shown in FIG. 63(A), in the variation in which the prefetch chance is executed, the effect control unit 130 does not normally receive the command (variation stop command or next variation start command) from the game control unit 100. The swing period FT1 becomes FT1'. Specifically, when the variation stop command is not received after the prefetch chance light emission effect is executed, the three decorative symbols 55 are the next command from the game control unit 100 (variation stop command related to the next variation. ) Rocks until it receives).

Further, as shown in FIG. 63(B), in the variation in which the reach production is executed, the production control unit 130 does not normally receive the command (variation stop command or next variation start command) from the game control unit 100. In this case, the swing period FT2 becomes FT2'. Specifically, when the variation stop command is not received after the reach light emission effect is executed, the decorative pattern 55 receives the next command (variation stop command related to the next variation) from the game control unit 100. Rock up to.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 63(C), the effect control unit 130 does not normally receive a command (fluctuation stop command or next variation start command) from the game control unit 100 in the variation in which the hit notification is executed. In this case, the swing period FT3 becomes FT3'. Specifically, if the variation stop command is not received after the hit light emission effect is executed, the three decorative symbols 55 are the next command from the game control unit 100 (the next command after the big hit game is performed. It swings until it receives a fluctuation stop command related to fluctuation.

The relationship between the lengths of the swing periods FT1', FT2', and FT3' is FT1'<FT2'<FT3'.

That is, the gaming machine of the present embodiment includes the game control unit 100 that controls the progress of the game, and the effect control unit 130 that controls the effect based on the progress of the game by the game control unit 100. The game control unit 100 variably displays predetermined identification information on the basis of the special game determination means for determining whether or not to perform a special game based on the establishment of the start condition and the determination result by the special game determination means. Along with the effect, the identification information display means for stopping and displaying after a lapse of a predetermined variation time, a variation start command indicating a variation display start of the predetermined identification information, and a variation stop command indicating a variation stop of the predetermined identification display are provided. Command transmitting means capable of transmitting to the control means. The effect control unit 130 has a command receiving unit capable of receiving the command transmitted from the command transmitting unit, and can display a decorative symbol image and a predetermined game effect associated with a change in the identification information. The predetermined game effect is a reach effect that expects the special game to be performed by setting a decorative pattern image in a reach state, and a reach light emission effect for the decorative pattern image that is executed when the reach state is established. , The hit light emission effect on the decorative pattern image executed when the reach effect is finished and the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed in a mode showing execution of the special game, and. The first swing time (FT2) of the decorative symbol from the execution of the reach light emission effect until the command receiving means receives a predetermined command (variation stop command of the variation in which the reach light emission effect is executed) is , The second swing time (FT3) of the decorative pattern until the command receiving means receives a predetermined command (variation stop command of the variation in which the hit light emission effect is executed) after the hit light emission effect is executed Longer than. Further, after the reach light emission effect is executed, the next predetermined command (the change stop command of the change is not received by the command receiving means) without receiving the predetermined command (the change stop command of the change in which the reach light effect is executed). The third swing time (FT2′) of the decorative pattern until the command receiving means receives the next fluctuation stop command) is a predetermined command (the hit light emission effect is executed) after the hit light emission effect is executed. The variation stop command of the variation) without receiving the command receiving means the next predetermined command (the next variation stop command of the variation stop command) until the command receiving means receives the decorative pattern It becomes shorter than 4 rocking time (FT3').

Further, the gaming machine of the present embodiment includes a game control unit 100 that controls the progress of the game, and an effect control unit 130 that controls the effect based on the progress of the game by the game control unit 100. The game control unit 100 variably displays predetermined identification information on the basis of the special game determination means for determining whether or not to perform a special game based on the establishment of the start condition and the determination result by the special game determination means. Along with the effect, the identification information display means for stopping and displaying after a lapse of a predetermined variation time, a variation start command indicating a variation display start of the predetermined identification information, and a variation stop command indicating a variation stop of the predetermined identification display are provided. Command transmitting means capable of transmitting to the control means. The effect control unit 130 has a command receiving unit capable of receiving the command transmitted from the command transmitting unit, and can display a decorative symbol image and a predetermined game effect associated with a change in the identification information. In the predetermined game effect, a decorative pattern image is displayed in a predetermined mode (a mode of pre-reading chance) so that the special game is expected to be performed based on the determination result by the special game determination unit later. Pre-determination production (pre-reading chance eye), pre-reading chance eye emission production for the decorative pattern image executed with the pre-determination production, and determination by the special game determination means after the pre-determination production is finished When it is determined that a special game is to be performed, a hit light emission effect on the decorative pattern image executed when the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed in a mode showing execution of the special game is included. Fifth swing time of the decorative pattern until the command receiving unit receives a predetermined command (variation stop command for fluctuations in which the pre-reading chance light emission effect is executed) after the pre-reading chance light emission effect is executed. (FT1) is the second swing of the decorative pattern until the command receiving means receives a predetermined command (a variation stop command of the variation in which the hit light emission effect is executed) after the hit light emission effect is executed. Shorter (or longer) than the time (FT3). Further, after the prefetch chance light emission effect is executed, a predetermined command (variation stop command of the variation in which the preread chance light emission effect is executed) is not received by the command receiving unit, and the next predetermined command The sixth swing time (FT1′) of the decorative pattern until the command receiving unit receives the next variation stop command of the variation stop command) is a predetermined command (the relevant hit) after the hit light emission effect is executed. Until the command receiving means receives the next predetermined command (the next variation stop command of the variation stop command) without the command receiving means receiving the variation stop command of the variation in which the light emission effect is executed. It becomes shorter than the fourth swing time (FT3') of the decorative pattern.

In addition, you may perform the zone production which makes a player expect a big hit over the variable display of one or more special symbols. The zone effect is an effect that suggests whether or not there is a big hit in the right of special symbol determination currently held (variation of the special symbol related to hold). For example, when the game ball wins the starting opening during the change of the special symbol, the right of the special symbol determination is suspended, and for the right, the determination of whether or not it is a big hit (preliminary determination) is performed. The zone effect is performed based on the result of the preliminary determination. For example, in the zone effect, an effect image of a color indicating high or low reliability is displayed on the periphery of the liquid crystal screen 5, or strip-shaped images displaying the name of the zone effect are displayed on the left and right ends of the liquid crystal screen 5. .. In the zone effect, even if the background image is switched to a special image or a predetermined character (for example, character A) appears, it is possible for the player to recognize that the zone effect is being performed. Good.

When the effect image related to the zone effect is displayed, the non-reach light emission effect, the reach light emission effect, and the chance eye light emission effect may be executed. The effect image related to the zone effect may be applied to the effect image related to each of the light emission effects. For this reason, the effect images related to the above-described light emission effects may be less visible due to the effect images related to the zone effects.

On the other hand, even when the effect image related to the zone effect is displayed, the effect is not applied to at least the small symbol 56, the reserved figure 52, and the fourth symbols 57 and 59, and the small symbol 56, the reserved figure 52, and The fourth pattern 57, 59 is not invisible and the visibility is not deteriorated.

In this embodiment, the zone effect is not executed during the hit light emission effect. When the hit light emission effect is executed, the zone effect is finished before the hit light emission effect is started (for example, when the decided effect is started).

In the present embodiment, the zone effects include a zone effect A and a zone effect B. The fact that the zone effect A is performed indicates that the expectation of being a big hit is "medium" (for example, 10% to 20%) in the variation of the special symbol after the next. For example, although the zone effect A may be executed when it is determined to be a big hit in the preliminary determination, a variation pattern for a loss in which the variation time of the special symbol is slightly longer in the preliminary determination (for example, SP reach production is supported. This is an effect that is easily executed when a (variation pattern) is determined.

Zone effect B is an effect with higher expectations than zone effect A. For example, the zone effect B is an effect that is easily executed when a variation pattern having a relatively long variation time of the special symbol (for example, a variation pattern corresponding to the SPSP reach effect) is determined in the preliminary determination. The zone effect B is more likely to be executed in response to the fact that the result of the preliminary determination is a big hit than when the result is a loss. Therefore, in the present embodiment, that the zone effect B is performed indicates that the expectation of being a big hit is "high" (for example, 40% to 50%) in the variation of the special symbol after the next.

In addition, in this embodiment, there are cases where the player is promoted to the zone effect B via the zone effect A. For example, during execution of the zone effect A, for example, the character "This is unpleasant" may be displayed on the entire screen as an effect that suggests promotion to the zone effect B. The zone effect B may be started along with the deletion of the character.

The zone effect may be an effect that is performed based on the result of the special symbol determination and suggests the result of the special symbol determination. In this case, the zone effect is started during the variable display of the special symbol and ends during the variable display of the special symbol.

[Timer interrupt processing by production control unit 130]
Next, details of effect control based on various commands from the game control unit 100 will be described with reference to FIGS. 64 to 69.

FIG. 64 is a flowchart showing an example of the timer interrupt process performed in the effect control unit 130. When the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on, the CPU 131 of the effect control unit 130 repeatedly executes a series of processes shown in FIG. 64 by interruption every fixed time (for example, 4 milliseconds). It should be noted that part or all of the processing shown in FIGS. 64 to 69 may be executed by any of the effect control unit 130, the audiovisual control unit 140, and the lamp control unit 150.

The effect control unit 130 (the CPU 131 thereof) first executes a command reception process (step S1001). The command reception process of step S1001 is a process of controlling an effect based on various commands from the game control unit 100. Specifically, the effect control unit 130 receives a command from the game control unit 100, determines the content of the effect according to the received command, and outputs the determined effect to the image sound control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150. A command to be executed by the computer is generated and set in the RAM 133. Details of the command receiving process in step S1001 will be described later with reference to FIG.

Following step S1001, the effect control unit 130 performs a command transmission process of transmitting each command set in the RAM 133 to the image acoustic control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150 (step S1002). For example, the command for starting the variation effect set in the process of step S1001 and the command for ending the variation effect are transmitted to the audiovisual control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150. As a result, the image/sound control unit 140 performs an effect such as image display and sound output, and the lamp control unit 150 controls the operation of the movable accessory 7, the lighting of the panel lamp 25 and the frame lamp 37, the effect button 26, and the like. Done.

Following the process of step S1002, the effect control unit 130 executes a transfer process (step S1003). Specifically, when the effect control unit 130 receives a control command from the audiovisual control unit 140, the effect control unit 130 transfers the control command to the lamp control unit 150. For example, the control command from the image and sound control unit 140 includes a control command for operating the movable accessory 7, a control command for operating the effect button 26, and a control command for executing the above-described lamp emission effects. Etc. Further, when the effect control unit 130 receives the control command from the lamp control unit 150, the effect control unit 130 transfers the control command to the image acoustic control unit 140. The control command from the lamp control unit 150 includes a control command indicating that the effect button 26 has been operated. By transmitting and receiving a control command via the effect control unit 130 between the image and sound control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, the movable accessory 7 is synchronized with the image displayed on the liquid crystal screen 5. An image is displayed in accordance with an operation, an operation on the effect button 26, or a lamp emission effect in which the panel lamp 25 and the frame lamp 37 emit light is executed.

[Command reception process by effect control unit 130]
Hereinafter, the command reception process executed in the effect control unit 130 will be described with reference to FIG. 65. FIG. 65 is a flowchart showing an example of the command receiving process in step S1001 of FIG.

First, the effect control unit 130 determines whether or not the hold command transmitted from the game control unit 100 has been received (step S1301). When it is determined that the hold command is received (step S1301: YES), the effect control unit 130 executes the hold command process (step S1302). Details of the hold command processing will be described later.

When the process of step S1302 is executed or when it is determined that the hold command has not been received (step S1301: NO), the effect control unit 130 determines whether the fluctuation start command has been received (step S1303). ).

When the fluctuation start command is received (step S1303: YES), the effect control unit 130 executes the fluctuation start command process (step S1304). Specifically, in step S1304, the effect control unit 130 determines the content of the change effect according to the change of the special symbol based on the received change start command, and the image and sound control unit 140 or the lamp control unit 150 determines. A command for executing the variable effect is generated. The command is transmitted to the audiovisual control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150 in the command transmission process of step S1002, and the variation effect is executed. Details of the fluctuation start command processing will be described later.

When the process of step S1304 is executed, or when it is determined that the fluctuation start command is not received (step S1303: NO), the effect control unit 130 determines whether the fluctuation stop command is received (step S1303). S1305).

When the fluctuation stop command is received (step S1305: YES), the effect control unit 130 executes fluctuation stop command processing (step S1306). Specifically, the effect control unit 130 transmits a variation effect end command for ending the variation effect to the image acoustic control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150. Thereby, for example, the decorative pattern 51 that is variably displayed (for example, temporarily stopped) on the liquid crystal screen 5 is permanently stopped, and the variation effect is finished.

When the process of step S1306 is executed or when it is determined that the fluctuation stop command has not been received (step S1305: NO), the effect control unit 130 determines whether or not the opening command has been received (step S1307). ).

When the opening command is received (step S1307: YES), the effect control unit 130 executes the opening process (step S1308). Specifically, the effect control unit 130 determines the opening effect based on the opening command transmitted when the jackpot is won, and causes the image and sound control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150 to execute the opening effect.

When the process of step S1308 is executed or when it is determined that the opening command has not been received (step S1307: NO), the effect control unit 130 determines whether or not the ending command has been received (step S1309). ..

When the ending command is received (step S1309: YES), the effect control unit 130 executes the ending process (step S1310). In the ending process, an ending effect indicating the end of the jackpot game is executed.

When the process of step S1310 is executed or when it is determined that the ending command is not received (step S1309: NO), the effect control unit 130 ends the process shown in FIG.

[Hold command processing by effect control unit 130]
FIG. 66 is a detailed flowchart of the hold command process in step 1302 of FIG. First, the production control unit 130 updates the special symbol determination holding number stored in the RAM 133 to a value obtained by adding "1" (step S1320). Specifically, when the hold command related to the first special symbol determination is received, the hold number of the first special symbol determination is updated to a value obtained by adding "1", and the hold command related to the second special symbol determination is received. When it is done, the number of holding of the second special symbol determination is updated to a value obtained by adding "1".

Next, the production control unit 130 acquires the advance determination information included in the received hold command (step S1321).

Next, the effect control unit 130 determines whether or not to perform the preliminary determination effect based on the preliminary determination information by lottery (step S1322). For example, the effect control unit 130 determines whether or not to change the hold icon 51 to a display mode having a higher degree of expectation than usual, and a change scenario, as a preliminary determination effect. For example, it is determined whether or not the hold icon 51 related to the winning of the starting opening this time is changed to a mode with a high degree of expectation at the time of winning, whether or not to be changed in the change of the special symbol after the next.

Further, the effect control unit 130 determines whether or not to display the prefetch chance item as a pre-determination effect. Specifically, the effect control unit 130 executes an effect (pre-reading chance effect) for displaying the pre-reading chance eye in a change before the change of the special symbol related to the present winning (the change of the target of the preliminary determination). Whether or not to do so, and its period (the number of times of variation for displaying the pre-reading chance) are determined. Here, a predetermined change pattern (for example, a change pattern in which reach effect is performed) is selected in the target change of the preliminary determination, and a predetermined change pattern (for example, reach effect is performed in the change before the target change). When the (variation pattern) is not selected, the effect control unit 130 determines whether or not to execute the prefetch chance effect by a predetermined lottery.

Next, the effect control unit 130 determines the winning sound when the hold icon 51 relating to the winning of the present starting opening is displayed (step S1323). For example, the effect control unit 130 determines a different winning sound according to the color of the hold icon 51 determined in step S1322.

Next, effect control unit 130 sets a hold increase command based on the results of the processing in steps S1322 and S1323 (step S1324). By transmitting this hold increase command to the image and sound control unit 140, the hold icon 51 relating to the winning at the starting opening this time is displayed on the liquid crystal screen 5 in the display mode determined in step S1322, and the step The winning sound determined in S1323 is output. In addition, in response to this hold increase command, the number indicated by the hold number 52 is increased by "1".

[Variation start command processing by effect control unit 130]
FIG. 67 is a detailed flowchart of the fluctuation start command process in step 1304 of FIG.

The production control unit 130 analyzes the received variation start command (step S1340). In this variation start command, information on the symbol indicating the determination result of the jackpot determination process (whether or not it is a jackpot, a jackpot symbol, etc.), information on this symbol is related to the first special symbol determination, the second special symbol. The winning start opening information indicating whether it is related to the determination, the information on the variation pattern of the special symbol, the information indicating the gaming state of the gaming machine 1, and the like are included. The production control unit 130 can specify the result of the special symbol determination by analyzing the variation start command. That is, it is possible to specify whether or not it is a big hit, and if it is a big hit, the type of the big hit and the variation pattern (variation time). Further, the current game state of the gaming machine 1 can be specified based on the information indicating the game state.

When the variation start command is analyzed, the effect control unit 130 determines an effect pattern indicating the content of the variable effect accompanying the variable display of the special symbol based on the analysis result (step S1341). Specifically, the effect control unit 130, based on the variation pattern (variation time) of the special symbol, the variation mode of the decorative symbol, the presence/absence of pseudo-relation, the presence/absence of the reach effect, the presence/absence of the various light emission effects described above and the aspect thereof. And so on. When it is determined in step S1322 that the pre-reading chance eye effect is to be executed, the effect control unit 130 determines the look-ahead chance eye effect mode or the pre-reading chance eye effect effect mode.

Next, the effect control unit 130 performs a lottery using effect random numbers to determine whether or not to perform various notice effects, etc., while the variable effect according to the effect pattern determined in the process of step S1341 is being performed, and The contents of the notice effect and the like are determined (step S1342).

Next, the effect control unit 130 sets, in the RAM 133, a variable effect start command for instructing execution of a variable effect according to the effect pattern determined in the processing of steps S1341 and S1342 (step S1343). This variation effect start command is transmitted to the image and sound control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150. As a result, the determined variation effect is executed by the image and sound control board 140 and the lamp control board 150.

Following the process of step S1343, the effect control unit 130 subtracts “1” from the number of reservations stored in the RAM 133 (step S1344).

[Timer interrupt processing by the image and sound control unit 140]
Next, with reference to FIG. 68, a timer interrupt process executed in the image and sound control section 140 will be described. FIG. 68 is a flowchart showing an example of timer interrupt processing executed in the image and sound control section 140. The image and sound control unit 140 repeats the series of processing illustrated in FIG. 68 at regular time intervals (for example, 1/60 second) during normal operation except for special cases such as power-on and power-off. Execute.

First, the image and sound control unit 140 (the CPU 141 thereof) determines whether or not a variation effect start command is received from the effect control unit 130 (step S1401). When the variation effect start command is received, the image and sound control unit 140 starts the variation effect according to the content of the variation effect included in the variation effect start command (step S1402). As a result, the decorative pattern 55 is started to change on the liquid crystal screen 5, and the change effect is executed. In addition, an animation in which each hold icon 51 is moved to the right is displayed on the liquid crystal screen 5, and the number indicated by the hold number 52 decreases by "1".

When the process of step S1402 is executed or when NO is determined in step S1401, the audiovisual control unit 140 determines whether or not an operation command corresponding to the operation on the effect button 26 is received (step S1403). .. When the operation command is received (step S1403: YES), the audiovisual control unit 140 controls the variation effect according to the operation command (step S1404). The image and sound control unit 140 sets an effective period during which the operation on the effect button 26 is effective during the variable effect. For example, the effective period is set in the decided effect immediately before the hit notification. When the operation command is received during the valid period, the audiovisual control unit 140 executes the effect according to the operation. For example, when executing the symbol matching effect or the accessory operation effect in accordance with the operation on the effect button 26 in the decided effect, the image sound control unit 140 causes the image related to the symbol matching effect or the accessory operation effect to be displayed on the liquid crystal. Display on screen 5.

When the process of step S1404 is executed, or when NO is determined in step S1403, the image acoustic control unit 140 determines whether or not it is time to execute the lamp light emission effect (step S1405). When it is time to execute the lamp light emission effect (step S1405: YES), the audiovisual control unit 140 transmits a control command related to the lamp light emission effect to the effect control unit 130 (step S1406). This control command is transmitted to the lamp control unit 150 via the effect control unit 130.

When the process of step S1406 is executed, or when NO is determined in step S1405, the audiovisual control unit 140 determines whether or not the variation effect end command is received (step S1407). When the variation effect end command is received (step S1407: YES), the audiovisual control unit 140 ends the variation effect (step S1408). Specifically, the image and sound control unit 140 causes the decorative pattern 51 that is swinging on the liquid crystal screen 5 to stop.

68. In addition to the processing shown in FIG. 68, the image and sound control unit 140 performs processing regarding a hold command, processing regarding an opening effect, processing regarding a jackpot game effect during a jackpot game, processing regarding an ending effect, and the like. Thereby, the hold icon 51 is displayed, the opening effect is executed, the jackpot game effect is executed, and the ending effect is executed.

[Lamp Control Processing by Lamp Control Unit 150]
Next, with reference to FIG. 69, a lamp control process performed by the lamp control unit 150 will be described. FIG. 69 is a detailed flowchart of the lamp control process performed by the lamp control unit 150.

As shown in FIG. 69, the lamp control unit 150 determines whether or not an operation on the effect button 26 has been detected (step S1501). When the operation on the effect button 26 is detected (step S1501: YES), the lamp control unit 150 transmits an operation command to the effect control unit 130 (step S1502). This operation command is transmitted to the image/sound control unit 140 via the effect control unit 130.

When step S1502 is executed or when NO is determined in step S1501, the lamp control unit 150 determines whether or not a control command related to the lamp light emission effect is received (step S1503). When the control command related to the lamp light emission effect is received (step S1503: YES), the lamp control unit 150 controls the lamp light emission effect (step S1504). The lamp control unit 150 stores a plurality of light emission patterns that cause the panel lamp 25 and/or the frame lamp 37 to emit light. For example, the lamp control unit 150, the light emission pattern corresponding to the reach light emission effect, the light emission pattern corresponding to the symbol alignment effect, the light emission pattern corresponding to the accessory operation effect, the light emission pattern corresponding to the first light emission effect, the second light emission effect. The light emission pattern corresponding to, the light emission pattern corresponding to the prefetch chance light emission effect, the light emission pattern corresponding to the pseudo continuous light emission effect, and the like are stored. The control command includes information indicating any one of the plurality of light emission patterns. The lamp control unit 150 reads a previously stored light emission pattern according to the received control command, and executes a lamp light emission effect of causing the panel lamp 25 and/or the frame lamp 37 to emit light. After receiving the control command, the lamp control unit 150 controls the light emission of the panel lamp 25 and/or the frame lamp 37 based on the light emission pattern stored in advance.

As described above, in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, it is possible to perform various light emitting effects by using the decorative pattern during the variable effect, and it is possible to improve the fun.

[Modification]
The present invention is not limited to the above embodiment, and may have the following forms.

For example, in the above embodiment, an example in which the first light emission effect and the second light emission effect are performed after the SPSP reach effect has been described, but another reach effect (N reach effect, SP reach effect) is performed. The first light emission effect and the second light emission effect may be performed later. When a variation pattern with a relatively long variation time (eg OP4) is selected, both the first light emission effect and the second light emission effect are performed, and a variation pattern with a relatively short variation time (eg OP1) is selected. When selected, at least one of the first light emission effect and the second light emission effect may not be performed. Moreover, even if a variation pattern having a relatively short variation time is provided, a variation pattern that allows an effect (direct hit effect) in which the three decorative symbols 55 are temporarily stopped in a jackpot mode without the reach effect being provided is prepared. Good. When the variation pattern for performing the direct hit effect is selected, both the first light emission effect and the second light emission effect may be performed, and at least one of the first light emission effect and the second light emission effect is performed. It does not have to be done.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the light emission performed along with each light emission effect (specifically, hit light emission effect, non-reach medium light emission effect, first reach pattern light emission effect, reach line effect, chance light emission effect). The board lamp 25 and/or the frame lamp 37 are made to emit light in a light emission pattern capable of discriminating the type of effect. In another embodiment, the light emission pattern for each light emission effect is displayed without displaying each image (specifically, the effect images 60 to 64, 70, 80, 82, 91, 92) related to each light emission effect. Each of the light emission effects may be realized by causing the panel lamp 25 and/or the frame lamp 37 to emit light.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the decorative pattern 55 is displayed on the image display unit (liquid crystal display device 5) that displays an image, and the light emission effect for the decorative pattern 55 is performed on the image display unit. In another embodiment, not only the image display means but also other display means (for example, a 7-segment display capable of displaying the numbers “0” to “9”) displays the decorative design, and the luminous effect for this decorative design is displayed. May be done.

Further, in another embodiment, a main liquid crystal display device corresponding to the liquid crystal screen 5 of the present embodiment and a sub liquid crystal display device (not shown) may be provided (hereinafter, “main liquid crystal” and “sub liquid crystal”). Abbreviated). For example, the sub liquid crystal is an image display device having a smaller display screen than the main liquid crystal. The sub liquid crystal, for example, is configured to be movable with respect to the game board 2, and is main in the width direction (left and right direction with respect to the player), height direction (up and down direction with respect to the player), and diagonal direction of the pachinko game machine 1. The front side of the liquid crystal is movable and rotatable. The sub liquid crystal is arranged at an initial position (for example, on the main liquid crystal side) that does not reduce the visibility of the effect image displayed on the main liquid crystal as much as possible when not operating, and the player can see a part or all of it. Placed where possible. The front surface and the back surface of the sub liquid crystal are given a predetermined decoration, and a light emitting element (not shown) such as an LED capable of emitting a light with a predetermined light emitting pattern is incorporated. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the effect even when no image is displayed on the sub liquid crystal. In such a configuration, for example, the effect images 60 to 64 related to the hit light emission effect, the non-reach light emission effect image 70, the images 80 to 82 related to the reach light emission effect, and the effect images 91 and 92 related to the chance light emission effect. It may be displayed on the sub liquid crystal. The corresponding decorative pattern 55 may be displayed on the main liquid crystal or the sub liquid crystal. The above-mentioned light-emission effects may be executed by causing the sub-liquid crystal to emit light in the light-emission pattern for the above-mentioned light-emission effects.

Further, the various values (for example, fluctuation time, probability, etc.) illustrated in the above embodiment are merely examples, and values different from those described above may be used.

Moreover, it goes without saying that the configuration of the pachinko gaming machine 1 described in the above embodiments is merely an example, and the present invention can be realized with other configurations. Further, the order of processing, set values, threshold values used for determination, and the like in the above-described flowcharts are merely examples, and the present invention can be realized with other orders and values without departing from the scope of the present invention. Needless to say.

Further, in the above embodiment, the case where the present invention is applied to a pachinko gaming machine has been described as an example, but the present invention is also applicable to other gaming machines such as a slot machine.

[Structure of the gaming machine according to the present invention and its effect]
As described above, the gaming machine according to the present invention may have the following configuration. Note that parentheses indicate correspondence with the embodiments, and are merely examples.

(Structure 1)
In the case of a big hit, the gaming machine according to the configuration 1 displays the decorative pattern (for example, a set of symbols) that suggests that the big hit game will be performed before the special symbol is stopped and displayed. For example, the effect image 61 is displayed), and the second light emission effect (for example, the effect image 62 is displayed) is performed after the first light emission effect.

Here, "performing the first light emission effect when displaying a decorative pattern that suggests that a jackpot game is to be performed" means that the decorative pattern that suggests that a jackpot game will be played is displayed first. When performing a light emitting effect, when performing the first light emitting effect at the timing at which a decorative pattern that suggests that a jackpot game will be performed, or immediately before displaying a decorative pattern that suggests that a jackpot game will be performed Including the case of performing the first light emission effect.

According to this configuration 1, before the decorative pattern is completely stopped, the first light emission effect and the second light emission effect can be performed in a state in which the decorative pattern suggesting that the jackpot game is performed is displayed, and the jackpot is achieved. A decorative pattern that suggests that a game is played can be emphasized.

(Structure 2)
In the case of a big hit, the gaming machine according to the configuration 2 emits light when displaying a decorative pattern (for example, a set of symbols) that suggests that a big hit game will be performed until the special symbol is stopped and displayed (first). At least one of the light emission effect and the second light emission effect is performed. Depending on the game state, there are cases where the light emission effect is performed and cases where it is not performed.

For example, in the normal game state, while executing both the first light emission effect and the second light emission effect, in the probability variation game state in which the variation time of the special symbol is shorter than in the normal game state, the first light emission effect is executed, but the second The light emitting effect does not have to be executed. Further, in the probability variation game state, the second light emission effect is executed, but the first light emission effect may not be executed.

According to this configuration 2, when displaying a decorative design that suggests that a jackpot game is to be played, it is possible not to execute the light emission effect in the probability variation game state, for example. As a result, it is possible to prevent the light emitting effect from being repeatedly performed in a relatively short time, and to prevent the player from getting tired.

(Structure 3)
The gaming machine according to the configuration 3, in the case of a big hit, the first light emission effect when displaying a decorative pattern (for example, a set of symbols) that suggests that a big hit game will be performed until the special symbol is stopped and displayed. Then, after the first light emission effect, the second light emission effect is performed. The decorative design includes a plurality of types of design including a first design (for example, an odd design) and a second design (for example, an even design) different from the first design. It suggests that the jackpot game is performed, and the case where the first light emission effect and the second light emission effect are displayed when the first symbol (symbol alignment of “3” symbols) indicating that the jackpot game is performed is displayed. There is a case where the first light emission effect and the second light emission effect are performed when the second symbol (the symbol arrangement of the “4” symbols) is displayed.

According to this configuration 3, even when the first symbol that suggests that the jackpot game is performed, or when the second symbol that suggests that the jackpot game is performed, the first light emission The effect and the second light emission effect can be performed, and the decorative pattern that suggests that the jackpot game is to be performed can be emphasized.

(Structure 4)
In the case of a big hit, the gaming machine according to the configuration 4 performs a light emission effect when displaying a decorative design that suggests that a big hit game will be performed before the special design is stopped. The decorative design includes a first design (for example, a design to which any number of "1" to "9" is attached) and a second design different from the first design (for example, a number is attached). There are a plurality of types of designs, including non-designated special designs). When displaying the first symbol (symbol alignment of numerical symbols) that suggests that the jackpot game is performed, a predetermined light emission effect (for example, the first light emission effect and/or the second light emission effect at the time of symbol alignment) is performed. , When displaying a second symbol (special symbol) that suggests that a jackpot game is to be performed, a luminous effect different from the predetermined luminous effect (for example, the first luminous effect and/or the second when the special symbol is stopped) Light emission effect).

According to this configuration 4, different light emission occurs when the first symbol that suggests that the jackpot game is performed and when the second symbol that suggests that the jackpot game is performed are displayed. The production can be performed, the production can be diversified, and the interest can be improved.

(Structure 5)
The gaming machine according to the configuration 5, as a jackpot game, a plurality of jackpots including a first jackpot game (4R normal jackpot) and a second jackpot game (10R probability variation jackpot) that is more advantageous to the player than the first jackpot game. The game can be executed. When the first jackpot game is played, until the special symbol is stopped and displayed, when a decorative symbol that suggests that the first jackpot game is played is displayed (in the probability variation gaming state, it was determined to be a 4R normal jackpot). In the case where the non-uniformity of symbols is displayed), the first light emission effect and the second light emission effect are not performed. When the second jackpot game is performed, until the special symbol is stopped and displayed, the first light emission when displaying a decorative symbol (a set of symbols of "7" symbols) suggesting that the second jackpot game is performed The effect is performed, and after the first light emission effect, the second light emission effect is performed.

According to this configuration 5, for example, when a disadvantageous jackpot that shifts to the normal gaming state is won, a decorative design suggesting that the first jackpot game is to be played is displayed, and the first light emission effect and the second light emission effect are also displayed. When not winning and winning the advantageous big hit, while displaying the decoration design which suggests that the second big hit game is done, it is possible to execute the 1st luminous production and the 2nd luminous production.

(Structure 6)
The gaming machine according to Configuration 6 suggests that the jackpot game may be performed, and does not suggest that the jackpot game is performed. , A pseudo continuous pattern, a temporary stop of a development pattern, etc.)), a predetermined light emission effect (for example, pre-reading chance light emission effect, pseudo continuous light emission effect, etc.) can be performed. In the case of a big hit, a specific light emission effect (first light emission effect in the hit light emission effect and/ Alternatively, the second light emission effect) is performed.

According to this configuration 6, when the decorative pattern is displayed in a mode that does not suggest that the jackpot game is performed, a predetermined light emission effect is performed, and the decorative pattern is displayed in a mode that suggests that the jackpot game is performed. If so, a specific light emission effect is performed. As a result, even if the jackpot game is not played, the player can be expected and the interest can be improved.

(Structure 7)
The gaming machine according to the configuration 7 has a predetermined light emission effect when displaying a decorative design (for example, a chance eye) in a mode that does not suggest that the jackpot game may be performed and that the jackpot game may be performed. (For example, pre-reading chance light emission effect) can be performed. In the case of a big hit, a specific light emission effect (first light emission effect in the hit light emission effect and/ Alternatively, the second light emission effect) is performed. The time from the end of the predetermined light emitting effect to the main stop of the decorative design differs from the time from the end of the specific light emitting effect to the main stop of the decorative design.

According to this configuration 7, when the decorative pattern is displayed in a mode that does not suggest that the jackpot game is performed, a predetermined light emission effect is performed, and the decorative pattern is displayed in a mode that suggests that the jackpot game is performed. If so, a specific light emission effect is performed. The period from the end of the predetermined light emission effect to the main stop of the decorative pattern is different from the period from the end of the specific light emission effect to the main stop of the decorative pattern. For example, if the period from the end of the specific light emission effect to the main stop of the decorative pattern is longer than the period from the end of the predetermined light emission effect to the main stop of the decorative pattern, execute the specific light emission effect longer. Therefore, the player can be satisfied with the fact that the jackpot game is played. Further, when the period from the end of the specific light emission effect to the main stop of the decorative pattern is shorter, the specific light emission effect can be performed in a shorter time, and the jackpot game can be executed earlier.

(Structure 8)
The gaming machine according to the configuration 8 has a predetermined light emission effect when displaying a decorative design (for example, a chance eye) in a mode that does not suggest that the jackpot game is performed and that the jackpot game may be performed. For example, it is possible to perform a pre-reading chance light emission effect). In the case of a big hit, a specific light emission effect (the first light emission effect in a hit light emission effect) when displaying a decorative design (for example, a set of symbols) that suggests that a big hit game will be performed until the special design is stopped and displayed. And/or second light emission effect). The execution time of the predetermined light emission effect is different from the execution time of the specific light emission effect.

According to this configuration 8, when the decorative pattern is displayed in a mode that does not suggest that the jackpot game is performed, a predetermined light emission effect is performed, and the decorative pattern is displayed in a mode that suggests that the jackpot game is performed. If so, a specific light emission effect is performed. The execution time of the predetermined light emission effect is different from the execution time of the specific light emission effect. For example, when the execution time of the specific light emission effect is longer than the execution time of the predetermined light emission effect, the specific light emission effect can be executed longer, and the player is satisfied with the fact that the jackpot game is performed. You can hold me. Also, when the execution time of the specific light emission effect is shorter, the specific light emission effect can be performed in a shorter time, and the jackpot game can be executed earlier.

(Configuration 9)
The gaming machine according to the configuration 9 displays the decorative symbol in the first mode (for example, the mode illustrated in FIG. 24L) that notifies that the jackpot game is executed during the variable display of the special symbol (for example, temporary stop). ) 1st light emission effect executed in the case of, and a decorative pattern in the second mode (for example, the mode illustrated in FIG. 24(N)) that notifies that the jackpot game is executed during the variable display of the special pattern It is possible to execute a second light emission effect that is executed when the display (for example, temporary stop) is performed.

According to this configuration 9, when notifying that the jackpot game is to be executed, the first light emission effect is executed when the decorative design of the first aspect is displayed until the decorative design is stopped and displayed, and the second aspect The second light emission effect is executed when the decorative pattern of is displayed. As a result, the light emission effect is executed twice in a state in which the decorative pattern is different, so that the impression of the light emission effect can be made different, and the player can be prevented from getting bored.

(Structure 10)
The gaming machine according to the configuration 10 is executed when a decorative symbol is displayed (for example, temporarily stopped) in a mode (for example, symbol alignment) informing that the jackpot game is to be executed during the variable display of the special symbol. It is possible to execute the light emission effect and the second light emission effect. The execution time differs between the first light emission effect and the second light emission effect (for example, the first light emission effect is executed at a timing earlier than the second light emission effect. Further, the length of time required for the first light emission effect is (It is different from the length of time required for the second light emission effect.)

According to this configuration 10, when notifying that the jackpot game is to be executed, the first light emission effect and the second light emission effect are executed at different execution times. As a result, it is possible to change the impression given to each player by each light emission effect.

(Configuration 11)
The gaming machine according to the configuration 11 is executed when a decorative symbol is displayed (for example, temporarily stopped) in a mode (for example, symbol alignment) informing that the jackpot game is to be executed during the variable display of the special symbol. It is possible to execute a light emission effect and a second light emission effect different from the first light emission effect (for example, an effect image 61 related to the first light emission effect and an effect image 62 related to the second light emission effect are different images). is there.

According to this configuration 11, different light-emission effects can be executed twice when displaying a decorative design in a manner of notifying that the jackpot game will be executed. As a result, it is possible to change the impression that each light-emission effect gives the player, and it is possible to effectively prevent monotonous effects when notifying that the jackpot game is to be executed.

(Configuration 12)
The gaming machine according to the configuration 12, during the variable display of the special symbol, a specific light-emitting effect (for example, hit) that is executed when the decorative symbol is displayed in a mode (for example, symbol matching) informing that the jackpot game is to be executed. Light emission effect) and a predetermined light emission effect (for example, reach light emission effect, non-reach medium light emission effect, pre-reading) that is executed when a decorative design is displayed in a mode that does not notify that the jackpot game is to be executed (for example, a loss mode) The opportunity light emission effect and the opportunity light emission effect) can be executed. The number of executions of these light emission effects is the first number of times in the case of the first variation pattern, and is the second number of times greater than the first number of times in the case of the second variation pattern.

According to this configuration 12, it is possible to change the number of times the light emission effect is executed depending on the type of the variation pattern. As a result, it is possible to effectively prevent the effect from becoming monotonous with a wide range.

(Configuration 13)
The gaming machine according to the configuration 13, during the variable display of the special symbol, a specific light-emitting effect (for example, hit) that is executed when the decorative symbol is displayed in a mode (for example, symbol matching) that notifies that the jackpot game is to be executed. (Light emitting effect), and a predetermined light emitting effect (for example, reach light emitting effect, non-reach in progress) that is executed when the decorative design is displayed in a mode that does not notify that the jackpot game is executed (for example, reach mode or loss mode) The light emission effect, the prefetch chance eye light emission effect, and the chance eye light emission effect) can be executed. The number of executions of the light emission effect during the variable display of the special symbol is different between the first symbol (for example, the left symbol) and the second symbol (for example, the medium symbol).

According to this configuration 13, it is possible to make the number of executions of the light emission effect different between the first symbol and the second symbol. As a result, it is possible to effectively prevent monotonous effects during variable display of special symbols.

(Configuration 14)
The gaming machine according to the configuration 14, during the variable display of the special symbol, a specific light emission effect (for example, a hit light emission effect) that is executed when the decorative symbol is displayed in a mode of notifying that the big hit game will be executed, Predetermined light emission effect (for example, reach light emission effect, non-reach medium light emission effect, pre-reading chance eye light emission effect, and the chance eye light emission) that is executed when the decorative design is displayed in a manner that does not notify that the jackpot game is executed. Production) and. The luminous effect can be executed a first number of times when in the first game state (for example, a normal game state), and can be executed a second number of times greater than the first number of times when in a second game state (for example, a probability variation game state). Is.

According to this configuration 14, it is possible to make the number of executions of the light emission effect different in the first gaming state and in the second gaming state. As a result, it is possible to provide a game property in which the game state is estimated by the number of times the light emission effect is executed.

(Structure 15)
The gaming machine according to the configuration 15, as a light emission effect, a predetermined light emission effect (for example, a second reach symbol light emission effect) that is executed when a decorative design is displayed in a reach mode during the reach effect, and a jackpot game is executed. It is possible to execute a specific light emission effect (e.g., a hit light emission effect) that is executed when the decorative pattern is displayed in a manner of notifying that. In the case of the first game state (for example, the normal game state), it is possible to execute a predetermined light emission effect and a specific light emission effect. Also, in the case of the second game state (for example, probability variation game state), it is possible to execute a specific light emission effect without executing a predetermined light emission effect.

According to this configuration 15, in the second game state, it is possible to execute a specific light emission effect without executing a predetermined light emission effect, and in the first game state, it is possible to execute both of these light emission effects. is there. As a result, it is possible to provide a game property in which the game state is estimated by the presence or absence of the light emission effect during the reach effect.

(Configuration 16)
As for the gaming machine according to the configuration 16, as a light emitting effect, a specific light emitting effect (for example, hit light emitting effect) that is executed when a decorative design is displayed in a mode of notifying that a big hit game is executed, and a big hit game is executed. It is possible to execute a predetermined light emission effect (for example, non-reach light emission effect, pre-reading chance light emission effect, and the chance eye light emission effect) that is executed when the decorative pattern is displayed in a mode that does not notify that it is done. is there. When notifying that the big hit game is not executed, and when the reach effect is executed, the specific light emission effect and the predetermined light emission effect are not executed (for example, when the reach lose eye is displayed, the hit light emission effect and the non-reach effect are being performed). Do not execute the luminous effect). When notifying that the jackpot game is not to be executed and the reach effect is not executed, the above predetermined light emission effect can be executed (for example, the non-reach light emission effect is executed during the display of the lost eye other than the reach eye). Possible). When notifying that the jackpot game is to be executed, it is possible to execute the specific light emission effect (for example, the first light emission effect can be executed while the symbol alignment is displayed).

According to this configuration 16, it is possible to execute the light emission effect when the reach effect is not executed and the jackpot game is not executed, and when the jackpot game is notified. As a result, it is possible to prevent the appearance rate of the luminous effect from becoming extremely low. Further, when the jackpot game is not executed and the reach effect is executed, the specific light emitting effect and the predetermined light emitting effect are not executed. Therefore, it is possible to effectively prevent the player from getting bored due to the appearance of light emission effects.

(Configuration 17)
The gaming machine according to the configuration 17, the first light emission effect and the second light emission effect, which is executed when the decorative symbol is displayed in a mode of notifying that the jackpot game is to be executed, during the variable display of the special symbol, Is feasible. When the reach effect is executed during the variable display of the special symbol, when notifying that the jackpot game is not executed, during the first game state (for example, normal game state) and the second game state (for example, probability variation game state) In either of the above, the first light emission effect and the second light emission effect are not executed (for example, the hit light emission effect is not executed regardless of the game state while the reach/miss eyes are displayed). When notifying that the jackpot game is to be executed, the first light emission effect and the second light emission effect can be executed in any of the first game state and the second game state.

According to this configuration 17, when the reach effect is executed and the jackpot game is not executed regardless of the game state, the first light emission effect and the second light emission effect are not executed. Further, regardless of the game state, when notifying that the jackpot game is not executed, the first light emission effect and the second light emission effect are executed. As a result, it is possible to give a sense of unity to the first gaming state and the second gaming state.

(Structure 18)
The gaming machine according to the configuration 18 can execute a light emission effect (for example, a hit light emission effect and a non-reach light emission effect) that is executed when the decorative symbol is displayed during the variable display of the special symbol. If the reach effect is executed when the jackpot game is not executed, the above-mentioned light emission effect is not executed (for example, the hit light emission effect and the non-reach light emission effect are not executed while the reach eyes are displayed), and the jackpot game is executed. If the reach effect is not executed if not performed, the above-described light emission effect can be executed (for example, the non-reach light emission effect can be executed during the display of the lost eye other than the reach eye). The light emitting effect includes a first light emitting effect and a second light emitting effect that are executed when a decorative design is displayed in a manner of notifying that a jackpot game will be executed. When executing the jackpot game, the first light emission effect and the second light emission during the first time (for example, a time longer than the execution time of the light effect during non-reach) during the control in the first game state (for example, the normal game state). It is possible to produce and produce. First during the second time (for example, a time different from the execution time of the first light emission effect and the second light emission effect during the control in the first game state) during control in the second game state (for example, probability variation game state) It is possible to execute the light emission effect and the second light emission effect.

According to this configuration 18, it is possible to execute the light emission effect when the reach effect is not executed and the jackpot game is not executed and when the jackpot game is executed. Accordingly, it is possible to prevent the appearance rate of the light emission effect from becoming extremely low even if the light emission effect is not executed when the reach effect is executed. In addition, when the big hit game is executed, it is possible to execute the light emission effect in the execution time according to the game state.

(Structure 19)
The gaming machine according to the configuration 19 can execute the light emission effect that is executed when the decorative symbol is displayed during the variable display of the special symbol. In the light emitting effect, a specific light emitting effect (for example, hit light emitting effect) that is executed when the decorative pattern is displayed in a mode that notifies that the big hit game is executed, and a mode that does not notify that the big hit game is executed There is a predetermined light emission effect (for example, non-reach light emission effect, pre-read chance eye light emission effect, and chance eye light emission effect) that is executed when the decorative pattern is displayed. When notifying that the jackpot game is not executed, when the reach effect is executed, the specific light emission effect and the predetermined light emission effect are not executed (for example, when the reach lose eye is displayed, the hit light emission effect and the non-reach effect are not performed. Medium emission effect is not executed), and when the reach effect is not executed, a predetermined light emission effect can be executed in a predetermined execution time (for example, a non-reach medium emission effect is specified while the lost eyes other than the reach eyes are displayed). Can be executed in the execution time of. When notifying that the jackpot game is to be executed, it is possible to execute the specific light emission effect at an execution time different from the predetermined execution time (for example, when the hit light emission effect is the predetermined execution time during the display of the symbol alignment, Can be run with different run times).

According to this configuration 19, it is possible to execute the light emission effect when the reach effect is not executed and the jackpot game is not executed, and when the jackpot game is executed. With this, it is possible to prevent the appearance rate of the light emission effect from becoming extremely low even if the light emission effect is not executed when the reach effect is executed. Further, it is possible to prevent the light emission effect from becoming monotonous by making the execution times of the specific light emission effect and the predetermined light emission effect different.

(Configuration 20)
The gaming machine according to the configuration 20, the predetermined effect during the variable display of the special symbol (for example, reach effect in which the chance up is executed) and until the decoration symbol is stopped and displayed when notifying that the jackpot game is executed It is possible to execute a light emission effect (e.g., a hit light emission effect) that is executed in step 1. The light emitting means (for example, the panel lamp 25 and/or the frame lamp 37) is caused to emit light in the first light emission pattern during the predetermined effect, and the light emitting means is caused to emit light in the second light emission pattern during the light effect.

According to this configuration 20, it is possible to make the light emission pattern different during the predetermined effect and the light effect. As a result, it is possible to give the effect form a wide range.

(Configuration 21)
The gaming machine according to the configuration 21 can execute the light emission effect that is executed when the decorative symbol is displayed during the variable display of the special symbol. In the light emission effect, a specific light emission effect (for example, a hit light emission effect) that is executed when the decoration symbol is displayed in a mode that notifies that the jackpot game is executed, and the decoration pattern is displayed in the reach mode during the reach effect. There is a predetermined light emission effect (for example, a second reach symbol light emission effect) that is executed when performing. The light emitting means (for example, the panel lamp 25 and/or the frame lamp 37) is made to emit light in the first light emitting pattern during the specific light emitting effect, and the light emitting means is made to emit in the second light emitting pattern corresponding to the reach effect during the predetermined light emitting effect. Let

According to this configuration 21, a specific light emission effect and a predetermined light emission effect can be executed as the light emission effect. As a result, it is possible to increase the number of modes of light emission effect. Further, since the light emitting means can emit light in the second light emission pattern corresponding to the reach effect during the predetermined light effect, it is possible to emphasize the reach effect more than the predetermined light effect.

(Configuration 22)
The gaming machine according to the configuration 22 has a predetermined light emission effect (for example, light emission at the chance eye) when the decorative pattern is displayed in a mode that does not suggest that the jackpot game is performed and that the jackpot game may be performed. It is possible to perform the effect and to cause the predetermined light emitting means (for example, the panel lamp 25 and/or the frame lamp 37) to emit light in the light emission pattern corresponding to the predetermined light emission effect (lamp light emission effect corresponding to the chance eye). is there. In the case of a big hit, a specific light emission effect (the first light emission effect in a hit light emission effect and It is possible to perform (/or second light emission effect) and to cause the light emitting means to emit light in a light emission pattern corresponding to the specific light emission effect (lamp light emission effect corresponding to the hit light emission effect).

According to this configuration 22, in addition to the above configuration 6, a predetermined light emission effect and a specific light emission effect are performed and the light emitting means is caused to emit light. Therefore, in addition to the effect of the above-described configuration 6, the light emitting means can be caused to emit light in association with each of the predetermined light emission effect and the specific light emission effect, which can further enhance the fun.

1 Pachinko gaming machine 5 Liquid crystal display device 7 Movable accessory 11 1st starting opening 12 2nd starting opening 13 Big winning opening 24 Speaker 25 Board lamp 26 Production button 37 Frame lamp 41 First special symbol display 42 Second special symbol display Container 51 Hold icon 52 Hold number 53 Fluctuating icon 55 Decorative design 56 Small design 57 4th design corresponding to 1st special design 59 4th design corresponding to 2nd special design 60-64 Effect image 70 Non-reach Medium luminous effect Image 80 Effect image 81 Reach line image 82 Effect image 91,92 Effect image 101,131,141,151 CPU
130 Effect control unit 140 Image sound control unit 150 Lamp control unit 65 Operation promotion image 651 Effective period image

Claims (1)

A gaming machine comprising a main control means and a production control means,
The main control means,
Determination means for determining whether or not to play a special game based on the establishment of the start condition,
Based on the determination result of the determination means, the identification information control means for stopping and displaying the identification information for notifying the determination result after a predetermined time after variably displaying the identification information,
And a control information transmitting unit for transmitting predetermined control information,
The effect control means,
It is possible to receive the control information transmitted from the control information transmitting means,
It is possible to execute a game effect according to the reception,
In the game production,
A decorative pattern effect that causes a decorative pattern to be variably displayed with the variable display of the identification information, and the decorative pattern that is stopped and displayed with the stop display of the identification information,
A reach effect that is expected to be executed when the special game is performed, and a reach effect that is executed when the decorative pattern is in the reach mode during the variable display,
There is a luminous effect executed when the decorative pattern is displayed during the variable display,
In the luminous effect,
A specific light emission effect executed when the decorative pattern is displayed in a manner of notifying that the special game is executed,
There is a predetermined light emission effect that is executed when the decorative pattern is displayed in a mode that does not notify that the special game is executed,
When notifying that the special game will not be executed,
When the reach effect is executed, the specific light emission effect and the predetermined light emission effect are not executed,
When the reach effect is not executed, the predetermined light emission effect can be executed in a predetermined execution time,
A gaming machine, which is capable of executing the specific light emission effect at an execution time different from the predetermined execution time when notifying that the special game is to be executed.

Images